Home

MX Component Operating Manual - Automation Systems and Controls

1. Setting Item Setting value b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Switch 1 CH1 communication speed CH1 transmission setting 00004 Switch 2 CH1 communications protocol 00001 Switch 3 CH2 communication speed CH2 transmission setting 00001 Switch 4 CH2 communications protocol 00001 Switch 5 Module station number 00001 1 Settings of CH1 and CH2 are indicated below b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH1 side CH2 side Setting Bit Description CH1 transmission CH2 transmission setting setting bO Operation setting 0 independent 0 independent b1 Data bit 0 7 0 7 b2 Parity bit 0 no Y 0 no Y b3 Odd even number parity 0 Odd number 9 0 Odd number 9 b4 Stop bit 0 1 0 1 b5 Sum check code 0 no 0 no b6 Online change 0 disable 0 disable b7 Setting change 0 disable 0 disable 12 When the communication protocol is set to GX Developer connection 0H the online 134 change bit b6 setting is invalidated and the online change is enabled regardless of the online change setting For details refer to Q series compatible C24 manual 3 Set the following to Odd number Odd Parity bit of the Communication Setup Utility ActParity of the ActProgType control property Setting CH1 CH2 communication protocol to GX Developer connection 0H sets the communication speed transmission settings to OH all OFF For details refer to Q s
2. QCPU Q mode Q12DCCPU V LCPU Q motion CPU FXCPU Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 1 QCPU Q mode Q12DCCPU V Q motion CPU Ethernet module Built in Ethernet port CPU Q12DCCPU V Q motion CPU QCPU Q mode CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 2 2 Details of communication forms The table at top right of each communication format description indicates whether the communication format can be configured with the operating system used Example 64 bit Windows is not supported Windows XP Windows Vista and 32 bit Windows are supported xp Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O x XP Windows XP Vista Windows Vista W7 32 bit 32 bit Windows 7 W7 64 bit 64 bit Windows 7 O Configurable x Not configurable 1 Serial communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O O For connecting the serial communication module refer to the manual of serial communication module O Applicable modules 1 The following table indicates the applicable modules for accessing programmable controller CPU with serial communication CPU Module model Q series compatible C24 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N QU71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 L series compatible C24 LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 FXon 485ADP FX2nc 485ADP FX3u 485ADP FX1n 485 BD FX2n 485 BD FX36 485 BD FX
3. Access Target Device Device Name QCPU a Q12DCCPU V LCPU QscPu FXCPU Q mode Z O x O x G23 Index register V x x x x 02 R o x O x 9 File register ZR oO x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output J Y O O O x x Link relay J B O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G o O O O x 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 Accessible to FX3GCPU only 3 WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only 4 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 5 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU SSDINSP A AISSSDIY FOL UOHEIIUNWWOD ASN Ndd 404 GOL 251 10 5 2 Accessible ranges 252 This section indicates the accessible ranges for CPU USB communication 1 Configuration Connected Relayed station CPU module
4. Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion E LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode 1 CPU V CPU CC IE Control O a2 oo x x x a a CC IE Field O O ER a 0 MELSECNET H O O x x x x N QnUDE H CPU gt 2 Ethernet O x x x x x 26 fo Serial communication O x O x x x D Q oo CC Link O O O x x E ae o D CC IE Field 3 O x O x x x g E o MELSECNET H x x x x x x 3 O LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x E Serial communication O x O x x x 3 2 CC Link O O O x x x Q 4 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU S 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 293 13 Personal computer side port Ethernet board GOT1000 side port Ethernet port CPU side port Serial a Configuration Connected Relayed S Serial station CPU module Ethernet Relayed network T Relayed station Relayed ji z CPU module gt ERA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inacce
5. Check complete 6 Click the button to exit from the utility 3 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button 2 Enter 11 in Logical station number and click the This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT Next gt button You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number y 3 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the PC side VF button PC side VF WELSECNETH board y lt o EE PC side I F MELSECNETIH board Board No Ist module Continued on next page 191 ainpssoid ssaddy L1 8 UOHESIUNWWOD H LANOASTAW 118 Continued from previous page aa 4 Setthe following items and click the Next gt button Please select the Network Station type Other station Single v Station type Other station Single 5 Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q06H Network No 2 Station No lt 2 Multiple CPU No 2 6 Enter a comment and click the button Th
6. CC Link G4 module f Personal computer Q mode Q00J i a MX Component COM1 Station number 1 CPU Sta No 0 is used Logical station number of 8 is used 176 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting switch settings of the CC Link G4 module The switch settings of the CC Link G4 module are indicated below Switch switch number Setting Station number setting switch 01 station number 1 Data link transmission speed setting switch 4 10Mbps SW Setting Operation mode setting SW1 SW6 Sw1 OFF SW6 ON Inter peripheral transmission speed setting Operation setting Setting is not required Automatic setting DIP switch SW2 SW3 SW Setting Parity bit setting SW4 SW5 SW4 OFF SW5 OFF SW7 OFF Test mode setting SW8 OFF online mode 3 Wiring the CC Link G4 module The diagram of wiring the CC Link G4 module to the CC Link module is shown below CC Link module DA AJ65BT G4 S3 Termination resistor Termination resistor DB DG SLD FG DC24V 177 ainpssoid SSIDIY Z g8g UOHEIIUNWWOD PH AUIT OD 8 8 4 Setting the network parameters Parameter setting may either be set on the Network Parameter CC Link Module Configuration screen of GX Works2 or from a sequence program a Setting parameter setting
7. Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network Paces Boe nec seno Q nee BGU S a gt 2 CG Ie Fiald ees ey E ie MELSECNET H O O x O O x S 5 QnUDE H CPU Ethernet 6 7 E a E 3 o Serial communication o x O x O x 5 CC Link O O O x O x 5 3 2 cee oe aaa oa i MELSECNET H O O x O O x z Q12DCCPU V 4 e x z 2 a z T Serial communication x x x x x x y CC Link O O O x O x 3 1 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE 3 Field Network is not supported Es 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported g 3 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 2 4 Q12DCCPU V does not support MELSOFT direct connection It is inaccessible when using Ethernet port direct connection Continued on next page 243 Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x Q motion CPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x CC IE Field O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication o x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller
8. Ethernet Control system Standby system oooo00 z Tracking cable gt wr Connection to control system Connection to control system via network M8 MX Component Control system Standby system nooo Tracking cable Point In the case of Ethernet connection it may take time from when a communication error occurs until communication starts after connection to the control system 320 APPENDIX 3 Automatic switching of communication path If a communication error occurs during access to the Redundant CPU connected to MELSECNET H Ethernet or CC Link IE Controller Network in Control system specification the communication path is automatically switched to continue access to the control system Hereinafter this automatic switching of the communication path is referred to as path switch The following describes the path switch conditions how to check for path switch occurrence and examples of access by path switch a Path switch conditions When a CPU is accessed under the following conditions access to the Redundant CPU is continued by path switch if a communication error occurs Conditions for continued access Operation mode Backup mode separate mode Target system Control system However if a tracking error occurred at a start of communication access
9. Personal computer A Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control 2 23 2 2 x CC IE Field 9 9 ll O O QCPU Q mode MELSECNET H O O x O O x QSCPU 1 Ethernet o x x O x Serial communication os x O x O x CC Link O O x O o CC IE Control 2 3 2 2 x CC IE Field 2 O O O O MELSECNET H O O x O O x Q12DCCPU V Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x Xx CC Link O O O x O x bi 2 Be 4 5 6 Relayed stations cannot be accessed through QSCPU Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time sp
10. Control names to be used and 4 Control the scroll bar to confirm the properties properties to be set are displayed E Communication Setup Utility be Sr Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test ActLogicalStationNumber ActUntType ActProtocoType ActNet wizard 1 0x0019 0x0004 0 2 0x001A 0x0005 2 Delete 3 0x002D 0x0008 0 4 0x0059 0x0005 1 5 0x0013 0x0004 5 6 0x0016 0x0000 1 7 0x000C 0x0007 0 8 0x001B 0x0004 0 9 0x0008 0x0006 0 10 0x0030 0x0000 o 11 0x001E 0x000F 1 12 0x002B 0x0014 0 13 0x002F 0x0015 1 14 0x001F 0x0010 0 15 0x0019 0x0004 0 16 0x0021 0x0008 0 n 17 0x0013 0x0013 1 T y Save text The file can be saved in the txt format by clicking the File Edit Format View Help ActLogicalstationNumber ActunitType ActProtocolType ActNetworkNumber ACtSt button on the lt lt List View gt gt tab ingTimeout ActTargetSimulator 0x0019 0x0004 o o o oxo01a 0x0005 i o o 3 0x0020 0x0008 o o o 4 0x0059 0x0005 1 0 o 5 0x0013 0x0004 5 o o Saved into file in txt format 5 When creating a user program directly enter the confirmed property values into Properties of the property window or change the property setting in the user program The screen shown left uses Visual Basic Directly enter properties in property window or change property setting on the user program 234 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES CHAP
11. Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Z O x O x o Index register v x x x x on R o x O x os File register ZR o x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output J Y O O O x x Link relay J B O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G oO O O O os 1 WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only 2 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 3 When accessing FX series CPU other than FX3GCPU and FX3u c CPU specify the data register D The file register R can be specified only when accessing FX3GCPU or FX3u c CPU 4 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 5 The device can be used to execute Read WriteDeviceRandom Read Write DeviceRandom2 Get SetDevice or Get SetDevice2 only when accessing FX3u c CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU SODIASP SAISSIIOY L 9L OL uoneoiunwwod jua Jedsue4 109
12. Status bar pl cap num scri a Item Description Reference Display the list of LabelSpace LabelSpace window The LabelSpace names are displayed on the list in ascending order based on the date of creation Aun leqe7 eZ Lowe oe S Display the logical station number structured data type and system label list of Navigation window S LabelSpace in tree format u 19S jaqe7 uo suonelado pE Page 122 3 E Section 7 3 3 Work window Display the system label list and the Structure Setting screen Page 127 Section 7 3 4 Task window Display the processing result in list format Page 130 Status bar Display the current status 5 Spa j g Section 7 3 6 119 120 1 Basic operations Operating procedure a Adding LabelSpace e O Menu gt Add LabelSpace e Right click the LabelSpace window and select Add LabelSpace Point The maximum number of LabelSpaces is 8 Note that the sum of LabelSpaces and referred Workspaces should be 16 or less b Changing LabelSpace name e Select the LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window Menu gt Rename LabelSpace e Right click the LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window and select Rename LabelSpace c Saving LabelSpace Menu gt Save LabelSpace e Exit Label Utility d Deleting LabelSpace e Select the LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window Menu gt Delete LabelSpace Right
13. Debug the program Yes CA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual using PLC Monitor Utility Y Section 4 4 PLC Monitor Utility Operating Procedure Completion of user application hd D 64 LA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual Start Visual C NET 4 Add controls to Visual C NET Start Label Utility and create and register labels eee Create a form and paste the controls 1 SS Section 7 3 ActProgType Start Communication Setup Utility and set the communication settings by following the instructions of wizard Define the pasted controls as dialog members using Class Wizard Start Visual C NET Add controls to Visual C NET Set the property logical station number gt CHAPTER8 of the pasted controls a Create a form and paste the controls DotUtIType Define the pasted controls as dialog members using Class Wizard Set the property logical station number of the pasted controls gt ES CHAPTERS CHAPTER 4 OPERATION PROCEDURES 4 3 3 When using VBA The following describes the creation procedures when using VBA Power on the personal computer and start Windows Y Install MX Component Version 4 ga L CHAPTER 3 Program setting type Select the setting type y Utility setting type Start Communication Setup Utility and set the communication settings by following the instruction
14. Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion Q mode CPU V LCPU QSCPU CPU FXCPU CCIE Had e oF ea e MELSECNET H O O x x x x COPE VERY Ethernet O x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x CC IE Field 9 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 4 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 292 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 12 Personal computer side port USB GOT1000 side port USB CPU side port CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module a Configuration station CPU Network module module Connected ee IE Field Relayed Relayed network Ethernet adapter module oe IE Field Network Relayed station Relayed Enermnet CPU module GOT USB ZERA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or X inaccessible
15. 000 0000s 229 8 17 1 Access procedure sorsi i nran eee Ea A denen eee 229 CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF PROGRAM SETTING TYPE 233 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 235 10 1 Considerations for Accessing Devices s sunuran ennaa 235 10 2 For Serial Communication 2 32 22 e54 00e eae ee eek ey E ites 236 10 21 Accessible devices ocio eae ee beard ce ee eS E edn eee 236 10 2 2 Acc ssibleirangessecs a a oe Me es 238 10 3 For Ethernet Communication 0 0 000 0000 teen tees 240 10 3 1 Accessible devices iertat niea eE i e eens 240 10 3 2 Accessible ranges when using Ethernet interface modules 020005 242 10 3 3 Accessible ranges when using built in Ethernet port CPUs 000005 243 10 3 4 Accessible ranges when using CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module 245 10 4 For CPU COM Communication 0 00 0 ccc tet teen eee 246 10 4 1 Accessible devices o a idos 246 10 4 2 Accessible ranges iii A od ee ae Se ald ee a 248 10 5 For CPU USB Communication 0 0 000000 tee ete eens 250 10 5 1 Accessible devices ue i ia ain Ga debaree Rw hg bea het here beter ae 250 10 527 Accessible TANGES lt 4 noana eae A ened 6 22 atta ri 252 10 6 For CC Link Communication n aasan ccc teens 254 10 61 Accessible devices 0200 radar daa dan ata 254 10 6 27AccesSiblE TANDIL Led A a 256 10 7 For CC Link G4 Communication
16. Expand the tree on the Connections window right click on Default Web Site and select Add Virtual Directory Specify the desired name for Alias and a folder path name to be released for Physical path and click the ox jbutton The alias is the underlined part of the URL to be specified on the Web browser http Mxcomponent NetTest asp APPENDIX 3 When using Windows 7 Operating procedure 1 0 Start gt Control Panel gt Programs gt T r seer conve anei P Turn Windows features on or off 2 Select Internet Information Services Turn Windows features on or off To turn a feature on select its check box To turn a feature off clear its check box A filled box means that only part of the feature is tumed on a VJ Games Indexing Service J Internet Explorer 8 NM Internet Information Services mu Internet Information Services Hostable Web Core Media Features Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 1 Microsoft Message Queue MSMQ Server Print and Document Services IJ RAS Connection Manager Administration Kit CMAK Remote Differential Compression FIA RIP Listener E g 8 a E E E 3 Expand the tree at Application Development Turn Windows features on or off e Features under Internet Information Services gt World Wide Web Ser
17. o Personal computer Starting GX Works2 MX Component GX Works2 he simulation function Q02HCPU Logical station number of 10 is used 186 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number 10 y Mia i Cancel Please select the PC side VF PC side VF GX Simulator2 Y Communication setting Simulator A QCPU Q mode y Target Simulator Cancel The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment GX Simulator2_Sample Cancel Registration complete Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button Enter 10 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Target Simulator CPU series GX Simulator2 Simulator A QCP
18. 0 00 002 cc ete 257 10 71 Accessible devices 3 4 00 Awe rada aaa dase 257 10 7 2 Accessible ranges orador eid Mae he att do ea 259 10 8 For MELSECNET H Communication oooococcooccocorre eens 260 10 81 Accessibleidevices 00d dao 260 10 8 2 Accessible ranges oo ooooooo een een nee e eee ee 262 10 9 For CC Link IE Controller Network Communication 00000 00 ee eee eeaee 263 10 9 1 AGcessible d viCes tinm A A Aenea ads 263 10 9 2 Accessible ranges aiii Sen eae hota wide ed Ca ea ek eee ieee 265 10 10 For CC Link IE Field Network Communication 0 0 0 00 00 00 cece eee eee 266 10 10 41 Accessible deViCes cio cd a dis 266 10 10 2 Accessible ranges niina e a a A ee Sha a ka 268 10 11 For Q Series Bus Communication nesae sanean 269 10111 ACCeSSIDIG dEVICES at a orena Greate A ONEA A a E actin ate ONE 269 10 11 2Accessible ranges ii A ah oa eis eae Wes 270 10 12 For Modem Communication noaa 00000 cr 271 10 12 1 Accessible devices 2 0 e teen eens 271 10 12 2 Accessible ranges tin e e e A ne ae les 273 10 13 For Gateway Function Communication o ooococonononenonone eee nee 275 10413 1 Accessible devices er eenei a EE id ars eee ey 275 10 13 2 Accessible ranges A A Pat RE ELA date Race See 275 10 14 For GX Simulator Communication 0 00 000 ct tees 276 10 14 1 Accessible devices ee strone nas paai en EEE e EE EEN ERD E ete eens 276 10 14 2 Accessible ranges e
19. real time graph display Device data of the programmable controller can be logged and device data can be sampled saved in real time lt Access gt Sample ox lt Excel gt 11 Compatibility with multi CPU system of QCPU Q mode Setting Communication Setup Utility or control properties enables access to the multi CPU system 12 Operability on PC CPU module Q series bus communication from the PC CPU module enables access to the QCPU Q mode on the same base Using the MELSECNET H communication control and CC Link communication control enables access to other stations via the MELSECNET H module and CC Link module controlled by the PC CPU module ode or the like QCPU Q mode QCPU Qm sooo PC CPU module selnesy Z4 E D o CC Link MELSECNET H QCPU Q mode or the like 2 13 Accessibility to gateway devices of GOT The gateway device data of GOT can be read written by using the gateway function communication of MX Component The device data of the programmable controller CPU that is being monitored by GOT can be read written by reading from writing to the gateway device data of GOT SS MX Component o Gateway device data of GOT can be read written using MX Com
20. Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver 10 MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver is registered under Universal Serial Bus controllers File Action View Help es AIRE EIT Computer Management Local Intel R ICH10 Family USB Enhanced Host Controller Actions a System Tools Intel R ICH10 Family USB Enhanced Host Controller 3 b Task Scheduler Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3 i gt E Event Viewer Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3 More Actions gt fi Shared Folders Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3 b 88 Local Users and Groups Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3 gt Performance Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3 l Device Manager Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3 a amp Storage E Disk Management USB Composite Device gt Ex Services and Applications USB Composite Device USB Mass Storage Device USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub Die pene tie 4 mile m r lt 7 Installation complete 336 APPENDIX Appendix 11 Updating USB Driver In Windows Vista or Windows 7 when upgrading the MELSOFT version that is incompatible with each operati
21. lt Page 93 Section 7 1 4 3 Specify the file name of communication setting to n gOz lt lt Win7 ENG C MELSEC Act Utl 49 Search Un p E CS O be imported PETER Name gt Date modified Type EE Desktop _ Communication Setup Utility act SPM ACT File I Downloads LablManager act ACT File F Recent Places 3 Libraries E Documents a Music a li Pictures BB Videos Cc n fl Computer 5 amp Win7 ENG C Q Ea Win7 SC E 4 is _ lll ee amp File name Communication Setup Utility act y ACT Regist File act A an Ca rc i o D n 4 D Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT ager Menu M Edit E Help H Register the system labeled with the following procedure gt is a ratte F Eo reete Lorca Sos tum Application gt MX Component gt Label Utility 3 To register System Label gt Label Utility starts Reference Workspace E Logical Station Number RE Structured Data Types System Label List Description Jajndwoo jeuosied Jayjoue uo sjeqe7 wuajs s Buisn y L G CAP NUM SCRL Continued on next page 83 Continued from previous page wy Menu M Edit E Help H 5 Menu gt gt Import lt Page 132 Section 7 3 9 Register the syste 1 Select the Label 2 To register Logical Station Number 3 To register System Label Add LabelSpace N Rename LabelSpace A Save LabelSpace S anes
22. 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the GOT transparent communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 17 GOT Transparent_Sample Y Delete Bagg SES IM di H G USB GOT Serial mii MNETH iii ne PC UF JUSB via GOT CPU type faoz CPU type faoz Time out 110000 ms NetworkNo fi Station No E Muttiple CPU None Exit Communication Setup Utility e Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 17 GOT Transparent_Sample Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication weg Communication test complete 232 Click Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 17 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 17 Click the Test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA M
23. 8 3 Performing communications check After completion of preparations for Ethernet communication execute ping in the MS DOS mode to check connection before starting communications on MX Component When normal C gt ping 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 When abnormal C gt ping 192 168 0 1 Request timed out If ping does not pass through check cable and module connections and Windows side IP address and other settings 153 4 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number gt a Logical station number Please select the PC side VF PC side VF Ethernet board z T Communication setting Protocol TCP Host P Address 192 168 0 1 Find CPU Built in Ethernet port on network 154 Connect module CPU module X Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF CPU module ba r Communication setting gt Start Communication Setup Utility and click the Enter 3 in Logical station number and click the Ne
24. Routing Param Transfer a Continued on next page 190 Start gt All Programs gt MELSEC gt MELSECNET H Utility Click the lt lt Board information gt gt tab and set the following items and click the sist button Channel 51 MELSECNET H 1 slot Mode Online auto reconnection Baud rate Any 10Mbps is set for this example NET mode MNET H mode Then click the Seung Poem seins button Set the following items and click the _s button Transfer to Network No 72 Intermediate Network No 1 Intermediate Sta No 2 Then click the button to close the dialog box Click the Fano Paren Trrse button to transfer the routing parameters to the MELSECNET H board CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page E MELSECNETIA uty OS 5 Click the lt lt Loop monitor gt gt tab Board list Board information Loop monitor Each sta status Em history monitor Memory 1 0 Test Target 41 gt p Channel 51 MELSECNET H 1 slot v Own Station Information Network No Group No Sta No Control Normal Sta Check that the loop is normal Eror Information Loop Information F Loop Status Nomal R Loop Status Nomai Loop Status Fost Mode fi fo fi Normal Sta During data link Reason for Transmission Interruption Normal comm Reason for Transmission Stop Normal comm
25. Set to the 32 bit integer display Real number single precision Set to the real number single precision display Real number double precision Set to the real number double precision display ASCII character Set to the ASCII character string display Data format Set the radix when the display is 1 6 bit integer or 32 bit integer Item Description DEC Set to the decimal display HEX Set to the hexadecimal display 110 Continued on next page CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS Item Description Set the order of the bit devices being monitored Item Description Bit order F 0 Display in order of F E 1 0 from left to right 0 F Display in order of 0 1 E F from left to right Display the device status e For the bit device status 1 indicates an ON status and O an OFF status Bit devices are monitored in units of 16 points If any device outside the range supported by the programmable controller CPU is included in the 16 points its value is displayed 0 For the C devices of FXCPU CO to C199 16 bit and C200 and later 32 bit are displayed separately The Write to Device screen is displayed by clicking the device name Page 116 Section 7 2 5 flickers under the scroll button during monitoring 1 Monitor screen 2 Target CPU name Display the communication target CPU name specified on Communication Setti
26. eee 316 Appendix 6 Flowchart for When Access cannot be Performed during Modem Communication 317 Appendix 7 Compatibility with Redundant CPU 00 0002 ccc cee ee 318 Appendix 8 Differences with previous version of MX Component 20 00e0 eee 325 Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names 0 05 326 Appendix 10USB Driver Installation 0 0 0 octets 328 Appendix 11 Updating USB Driver 0 2 2 0 60 e eee 337 Appendix 12Warning Messages on Windows 2 0 0 0 0 cece cece ete eee eee 343 Appendix 12 1 Overview of warning messages 0 000 cece cece eee eee eee 343 Appendix 12 2 Methods for disabling warning Messages 0 000s 344 REVISION Sita de ceer ate eae ny teary A Rtas ee ee Ga ae 351 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL The following explains the page composition and symbols in this manual The content of the example page used here are different from the actual content for the intention of explaining how to use this manual Indicates the chapter of currently open page Operating procedure 7 2 PLC Monitor Utility Describes the operating This section explains how to operate and set PLC Monitor Utility procedure of the function 21 Operations on Transfer setting screen Symbols used in this Operating procedure manual Symbols used in this manual his screen is used to set connection from the personal computer to the prog
27. uoneljelsu 3 2 Registered Icons Installation of MX Component registers the following icons to Start 5 All Programs gt MELSOFT Application gt MX Component Icon Name Description Label Utility Starts Label Utility PLC Monitor Utility Starts PLC Monitor Utility Communication Setup Utility Starts Communication Setup Utility 58 3 3 Uninstallation CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION The following explains the uninstallation procedure Screens from Windows 7 are used except for different operations required in other operating systems Point Uninstalling deletes all the settings within Communication Setup Utility To avoid this export the file storing the settings Operating procedure 05 y 44 Search Contr Pane pl QO gt Control Panel Adjust your computer s settings View by Category Y e System and Security User Accounts Review your computer s status J Change account type Back up your computer 9 igi ae Find and fix problems Appearance and Personalization Chi the the Network and Internet Ay naasen Gi View network status and tasks SZ Choose homegroup and sharing options Y Harchand Sound Clock Language and Region Chas keyboards the jut methods o Vn sein pines DE Site PEAD Add a device Ease of Access Change display language gt Pa Let Windows suggest settings o AS primicia dpi BD Get programs j oe
28. 5 141 142 b For 1 n communication Setting Switch switch number Module 1 Module 2 CH1 side CH2 side CH1 side CH2 side Mode setting switch 0 5 format 5 5 format 5 Station number setting switch 1 3 OFF ON OFF Operation setting switch SW01 independent feynichrenods independent operatioh operation operation Data bit setting SW02 ON 8 bit ON 8 bit Parity bit setting SW03 ON yes ON yes Even odd number parity setting SW04 OFF odd number OFF odd number Transmission specification SW07 Stop bit setting SW05 OFF 1 bit OFF 1 bit Sum check setting SW06 ON yes ON yes Online change enable disable setting ON enable ON enable setting switch Setting change enable disable setting OFF disable OFF disable SW08 19200bps 19200bps SW Setting SW Setting Transmission speed setting Swog OFF SWO09 OFF SWO9 to SW12 SW10 ON SW10 ON SW11 ON Sw11 ON Sw12 OFF SW12 OFF SW13 to SW15 All OFF All OFF CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 n communication Operating procedure 1 2 This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication info
29. 94 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 1 6 Operations on Communication Setting Wizard screens These screens are used to set the logical station number required to perform communication with the utility setting type 1 Outline of Communication Setting Wizard The logical station number required to perform communication with the utility setting type is set with the wizard The following are the places and descriptions of the settings set on the Communication Setting Wizard screens For the wizard screen settings refer to the following section 3 Page 96 3 in this section Explanation of Communication Setting Wizard screens Wizard 1 6 Wizard 3 Wizard 5 Connected station i Relayed station Personal computer i o i o i i A Connected network Relayed network 7 Wizard 2 Wizard 4 Screen Name Description Wizard 1 Set the logical station number Wizard 2 Set the connected network between the personal computer and connected station programmable x controller CPU and module Wizard 3 Set the connected station programmable controller CPU and module S Wizard 4 Set the relayed network between the connected station programmable controller CPU and module and E relayed station programmable controller CPU and module S Wizard 5 Set the relayed station programmable controller CPU S
30. By using GX Developer and GX Simulator or the simulation function of GX Works2 debugging can be performed on a single personal computer without connecting the programmable controller Access GX Simulator or GX Simulator2 on the same personal computer and perform debugging V Ui MX Component il Personal computer Programmable controller CPU is not required to be connected 1 This function is not supported by QSCPU Point O GX Developer and GX Simulator are separately required to use GX Simulator oO gt Programmable controller O GX Works2 is separately required to use GX Simulator2 The maximum of 4 projects can be simulated simultaneously 25 seJmesy Z4 10 A wide variety of programming languages supported MX Component supports VBScript and VBA as well as Visual Basic and Visual C a Creation of monitoring page using VBScript 1 Monitoring page can be created in HTML format A graphical monitoring home page HTML format can be created by using the text editor Visual Basic Visual C or the like is not required to be purchased Monitoring using Internet Explorer a MX Component i Web browser Inter
31. Call back reception waiting time out 120 seconds Item Description Line connection CD signal wait time Set the line connection CD signal confirmation time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the CD signal does not turn ON within the set time depending on the line connected region example overseas Line connection modem report wait time Set the line connection modem report wait time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the response speed of the modem is low Line disconnection CD signal wait time Set the line disconnection CD signal confirmation time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the CD signal does not turn OFF within the preset time depending on the line connected region example overseas Line disconnection delay time Set the line disconnection delay time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the response speed of the modem is low Data transmission delay time Set the data transmission delay time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the response speed of the modem is low AT command response wait time Set the AT command response wait time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the response speed of the modem is low Password cancellation response wait time Set the password cancellation response wait time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the quality of the line with the other end is low AT command password cance
32. Delete LabelSpace D Refresh system label data for Control Logical Station Number G Workspace Exporti System Labet Exitog m labeled with the following procedure ISpace Description r cae Num sci e Es Win7 ENG CG MELSEC Act gt Uti M 41 Organize New folder BE 6 Specify the file name of LabelSpace to be imported Ke Favorites Name Date modif EE Desktop L Communication Setup Utility act ied Type CT File I Downloads A El Recent Places A Libraries E Documents a Music El Pictures E Videos fl Computer L Win7 ENG C Ea Win7 SC E File name LablManager act 7 O Menu gt Refresh system label data for Control lt Page 131 Section 7 3 7 The labels referred from controls are updated SE Menu M Edit Help H Add LabelSpace ty Register the system labeled with the following procedure 1 Select the LabelSpace Rename LabelSpace A 2 To register Logical Station Number 3 To register System Label Save LabelSpace s canes Delete LabelSpace D Logical Station Number G Workspace Export Import System Label Exito Alt F4 Description T cas Num scrr Registration complete 84 CHAPTER 6 STARTING AND EXITING UTILITIES CHAPTER 6 STARTING AND EXITING UTILITIES Thi
33. Example For CPU COM communication Q25HCPU Personal computer Communication target CPU Q25HCPU CAN Transmission speed Transmission control Time out period Station number 1 o El ji MELSECNET H E AR Network No 1 FEA ____ A CPU COM QJ71LP21 1 communication COM 1 Station number 3 i QJ71LP21 I 1 Target information up to Communication target CPU is combined into one data to which logical station number is assigned 2 Utility setting type Communication Setup Utility logical station number is used to create a user program In the user program the communication line can be connected easily by simply specifying the logical station number set on Communication Setting Wizard 3 Program setting type A user program is created without using Communication Setup Utility Set the ACT control settings for the corresponding communication in the user program or on the property page or the like of Visual Basic or Visual C The required settings for the properties depend on the ACT control 22 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 overview 1 1 Overview of MX Component MX Component is a tool designed to implement communication from an personal computer to the programmable controller without any knowledge of communication protocols and modules Program development with serial communication and Ethernet
34. K Page 312 Appendix 3 RS 232 Cable Wiring Examples for Serial Communication Point Only the RS 232 connector applicable for connection of the personal computer and serial communication module The RS 422 connector or RS 422 485 terminal block cannot be used CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 Ethernet communication a when Ethernet interface module is used XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O Q For connecting the Ethernet module refer to the manual of Ethernet module O Considerations The accessible range for Ethernet communication is the same segment only The range beyond the router and gateway cannot be accessed O Applicable modules The following table indicates the applicable modules for accessing the programmable controller CPU via Ethernet modules For the FX series Ethernet module refer to the user s manuals for the FX series Module model QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 100 Q series compatible E71 b When built in Ethernet port QCPU is used XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O Q For connecting the built in Ethernet port QCPU refer to the manual of built in Ethernet port QCPU O Considerations The accessible range for the direct connection without specifying the IP address is the same segment only The range beyond the router and gateway cannot be accessed 37 SWO UONedIUNWWOD JO S 18 9q ZZZ WJO4 uog
35. MELSECNET H Network number 2 station number 1 21 MELSECNET H module controlled by Network number 2 station number 2 ua s S NdO MNN y xipueddy 315 Appendix 9 Number of Mountable Network Modules for Q00JCPU QOOUJCPU QO0CPU QO0UCPU Q01CPU or Q01UCPU The following indicates the number of mountable network modules that can be connected when QOOJCPU QOOUJCPU QOOCPU QOOUCPU Q01CPU or QO01UCPU is used Network Module Number of Mountable Modules MELSECNET H module 1 module Ethernet module 1 module CC Link module Function version B or later 2 modules 1 module CC Link IE Controller Network module Therefore the following systems cannot be configured Example 1 Since the number of applicable Ethernet modules is 1 the part of the system indicated by the dotted line cannot be configured MX Component Example 2 Since the number of applicable MELSECNET H modules is one the part of the system indicated by the dotted line cannot be configured MX Component QJ71 LP2 316 APPENDIX Appendix 6 Flowchart for When Access cannot be Performed during Modem Communication If the programmable controller CPU cannot be access
36. Menu gt System Label gt System Label List gt Rename Right click the system label list name on the Navigation window and select System Label List gt Rename c Deleting system label list 122 Select the system label list name to be deleted on the Navigation window gt Menu gt System Label gt System Label List gt Delete Right click the system label list name to be deleted on the Navigation window and select System Label List gt Delete Select the system label list name to be deleted on the Navigation window and press the Delete key CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 2 Selecting data types Screen display Click on the data type entry field of the system label list or the structure setting Type Selection Es Data Type Y A Simple T 5 Word Signed k ypes s Double Word Signed Structure T Word Unsigned Bit 16bit Double Word Unsigned Bit 32Bit FLOAT Single Precision Array Element FLOAT Double Precision EJaRRAr a Fme Timer Counter Retentive Timer Coc cm Operating procedure 1 Selecta type from Type Class 7 Item Description Simple Types Specify this to select a data type from basic types bit word Specify this to select a data type from the defined structures Not displayed for the structured data settings Structure 2 Inthe Data Type field select the data type and structure 3
37. 351 Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Excel Access are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 352 MX Component Version 4 Operating Manual MODEL SW4DNC ACT O E MODEL 13JU75 SH NA 081084ENG A 1207 KWIX sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAI When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
38. CO CO OF O x x x x xixixi x xix xix xix xix olx xixi xiolololololx xl x xi x x x O O O OO OC OF OJ OF OF OF OF OF CO OF OF OF OF CO OF OF CO OF OF O x x x x O O O O O OJ O CO OF OF OF CO OF CO CO OF xO OF OF CO CO xX x x x x x x xix x xix x xixixi x xi x xixixixi x xix xixixi x x x xix xix ol lolxi xixi x xixixixi xi ol xliolxixi xi xi ololololx x Accumulator A 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed Continued on next page 260 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Access Target Device Device Name QCPU E Own Q12DCCPU V LCPU Q scpu FXCPU Q mode board Z O x O x x x Index register V x x x x x x R o x O x x x File register ZR o x O x x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x x Link input JAX O O O x x x Link output JAY O O O x x x Link relay J B O O O x x x Direct link Link special relay JASB O O x x x Link register J W O O O x x x Link special register J SW O O O x x x Special direct buffer memory U G o O O x x x 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 3 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 2 When access target is
39. Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution gt too es GOA lt All Control Panel tems Programs and Features 49 Search Progra pl Control Panel Home Uninstall or change a program View installed updates To uninstall a program select it from the list and then click Uninstall Change or Repair Tum Windows features on or Gu Organize Uninstall Change z Install a program from the 2 network Name Publisher Installed Microsoft Visual F 2 0 Runtime Microsoft Corporation 3 30 2011 E Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 ADO NET Entity Framew Microsoft Corporation 3 20 2011 dE Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtim Microsoft Corporation 3 30 2011 Microsoft Visual Studio Macro Tools Microsoft Corporation 3 30 2011 FE MSXML 4 0 SP2 KB954430 Microsoft Corporation 12 22 201 EE MSXML 4 0 SP2 KB973688 Microsoft Corporation 12 2 01 Eg MT Developer2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPOR 10 30 201 E MX Component 6 12 2012 EE MX Sheet 3 30 2011 BPX Developer 11 2 2010 FERT ToolBox2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPOR 10 30 201 BR SWIDNC CCEEF B MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPOR 1 24 2011 P Trend Micro OfficeScan Client Trend Micro 6 5 2012 M Visual Studio 2010 Tools for SQL Server Compact 3 5 Microsoft Corporation 3 30 2011 Y Web Deployment Too Microsoft Corporation 3 20 2011 WinShot WoodyBells software 8 19 2010 q Ei Ch Are you sure you want to completely remove MX Com
40. Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs 2 Install the Windows component Internet Information Service IIS The Windows XP Professional setup CD is required for installation 2 When using Windows Vista or Windows 7 g Operating procedure 1 Start gt Control Panel gt Program gt Turn Windows features on or off 2 Install Internet Information Services Point For details of Web server installation method corresponding to the operating system refer to the installation procedure attached to the corresponding operating system 302 APPENDIX Appendix 2 4 Setting the Internet access account Set the authorities to Internet access accounts 1 When using Windows XP Professional When the Active Server Pages ASP pages using MX Component are released the IUSR_Name Internet Server Anonymous Access must be given the Debug programs right Set the settings in the following procedure Operating procedure minita Ton a 1 UD Start gt Control Panel gt Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qu O YD ser En Faes F BB rover snc Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy Eg Administrative Tools File and Folder Tasks Rename this file ES Move this file Dy Cony this file Publish this file to the Web Email this file X Delete this file Other Places Details View and modify local security policy such as user rights anc 1 55 KB SI My
41. Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported ejnpow Jajdepe 19U19U 13 YIOMISN PII 3 AUN D0 Buisn u ym sebuel 3 qIssad29Y P S OL 245 10 4 For CPU COM Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for CPU COM communication 1 0 4 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for CPU COM communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU Access target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Function input FX O x x x Function output FY O x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O x x Special register SD O O O x x Input relay X O O O x O Output relay Y O O O x O Internal relay M O O O x O Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O x x Edge relay V O x O x x Link relay B O x O x x Data register D O O O x O Link register W O x O x x Contact TS O x O x O a Coil TC O x O x O Present value TN O x O x O Contact TS O x O x O a Coil TC O x O x O Present value TN O x O x O Retentive Contact TS O x O x x timer Coil TC O x O x x ST Present value TN O x O x x Link special relay SB O x O
42. ME Spin devices a update target Universal Serial Bus Scan for hardware changes Property Hardware Ids Value USB VID_06D34PID_18008REV_0100 USB VID_06D38P1D_1800 Properties General Diver Detais Launches the Update Driver Software Wizard for the selected device y le Unknown device 6 Select Browse my computer for driver software LL Update Driver Software Unknown Device How do you want to search for driver software gt Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings Locate and install driver software manually Cancel Continued on next page Jeauq gsn Bunepdn xipueddy 339 Continued from previous page Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location C MELSEC Easysocket USBDrivers Y Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device Would you like to install this device software Name Easysocket USB Drivers I Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Chi You should only install driver software from publishers you trust
43. Multiple CPU No 3 Logical station number Communication diagnosis count Result fy Communication Setup Utilit Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test 14 0 Bus_Sample Y Test 5 Diagnosis count ry Result CPU name Mean time of communication 4 Click Na Communication test complete Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 14 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 14 Click the test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 207 ainpasoid ssa00V yL 8 uonesiunwwoy sng Salas O pL 8 8 1 5 Modem Communication This section explains the modem communication procedures and setting examples for the utility setting type Point When perfo
44. TC a T D Present value TN D Contact TS ne Counter Coil TC C Present value TN Retentive Contact TS timer Coil TC ST Present value TN Link special relay SB UOHESUNWWOD YOMN J9 OJUOD JI AUN DD 104 6 0L Link special register SW Step relay S Direct input DX Direct output DY x x x x O O O O OO Of O OF OF OF OF CO CO CO Of OF OF OF OF CO CO CO OF O x x x x xixi xix x x xix x x xix olx x x xiolololololx x x x x x x O O O O O Of CO CO OF OF OF OF CO CO CO OF OF OF OJ OF OF OF CO CO O x xX xix O O O O O OJ O CO OF OF CO CO OF CO CO OF xO OF OF CO CO x x x x x x xixixixi xixixixi xi xt x x xixixixi xixixixi xixi x x x x xixi x xl ololxi xixixi xixixi xix olxixi xixixixi ololololxl x Accumulator A 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed Continued on next page 263 Access Target Device Device Name QCPU a Own Q12DCCPU V LCPU QscPu FXCPU Q mode board Z O x O x x x Index register V x x x x x x R o x O x x x File register ZR o x O x x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x x Link input JAX O O O x x x Link output JAY O O O x x x Link relay J B O O O x x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x x Link register J W O O O x x x Link special regis
45. Transmission control procedure Select the transmission control procedure Station number setting Set the station number Time out judge time 1 Set the timeout period 1 Not applicable when Operate Communication Setting is OFF Point O When communication setting is set turn on the FXCPU again after writing to programmable controller O When performing multi drop connection set the same communication settings for the devices However check that the station number is not overlapped 137 se npou uoeorunwwos jenas jo ShuINes 8 uoneosiunwwoy elas 18 138 b Settings by writing values to the special data registers in a sequence program 1 D8120 communication format D8120 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Bit Description Setting detail 0 7 bit bO Data length 1 8 bit b1 b2 b1 None 0 0 Parity _ _ ___ _ pr Odd number 0 1 b2 Even number 1 1 0 1 bit b3 Stop bit 1 2 bit b4 b7 b6 b5 b4 300bps 0 0 1 1 b5 600bps 0 1 0 0 1200bps 0 1 0 1 Transmission speed b6 2400bps 0 1 1 0 4800bps 0 1 1 1 9600bps 1 0 0 0 b7 19200bps 1 0 0 1 b8 0 b9 0 b10 DD GEI A gt gt E EE _ Qa _LR5 yL DI b11 b10 H W type b11 RS 485 0 0 b12 0 0 Not available b13 Sum check 1 Available
46. View event logs Scheduletasks 7 gt Continued on next page uopejjesuj 198AUQ GSN OL xipueddy 333 Continued from previous page Organize 5 Open TO Ss Sper ana security Admins Too Toleman p oia Burn F Favorites HE Desktop Name 2 Component Services Date modified Type Shortcut IB Downloads T Recent Places 3 Libraries E Documents a Music Pictures H Videos 2 Computer amp Win7 ENG C Ea Vista JP D El Event Viewer A SCSI Initiator En Local Security Policy 5 Performance Monitor BB Print Management ah Services System Configuration Task Scheduler P Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 7 13 2009 9 46 PM 13 2 H PM hortcu 7 13 2009 9 41 PM Shortcut 7 13 2009 9 42 PM 7 13 2009 9 41 PM 8 5 2010 8 05 PM 7 13 2009 9 41 PM 8 5 2010 8 05 PM 7 13 2009 9 41 PM 7 13 2009 9 41 PM 7 13 2009 9 42 PM 7 13 2009 9 41 PM Data Sources ODBC Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut Shortcut gt Shortcut File Action View Help Computer Management Date modified 7 13 2009 9 41 PM Date created 7 13 2009 9 41 PM Size 1 26 KB es 250 80 EF amp Computer Management Local a System Tools b Task Scheduler gt E Event Viewer gt fl Shared Folders b 8 Local Users and Groups b Performance a Device Manager a 3 Storage SP Disk Management
47. aiqisseo0y Z 91 0L uoneoiunwiwod jussedsues 109 104 9L 0L 6 Personal computer side port USB GOT1000 side port USB CPU side port Q series compatible C24 or L series compatible a Configuration Connected station CPU Connected module Relayed module GOT USB Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module All Ss Sx EEE Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O y 3 x 2 x CC IE Field 2 a a MELSECNET H O O x x O x QCPU Ethernet O x x x O x 4 Q series compatible C24 Q mode Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x Multi drop connection 4 O x O x x x Independent mode CC IE Field O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x Ethernet x x x x x x LCPU L series compatible C24 Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x Multi drop connection i O x O x x x Independent mode 4 1 2 3 4 Inaccessible
48. gt Ey Services and Applications Y ba Disk drives gt KE Display adapters gt DVD CD ROM drives b jj Human Interface Devices bq IDE ATA ATAPI controllers b IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers gt Jungo gt Keyboards gt B4 Mice and other pointing devices p i Monitors gt Network adapters 4p Other devices ip Universal Serial Bus USB Controller ify Unknown d i Unknown de Update Driver Software gt Portable Devices Disable N Uninstall gt E Processors p a Sound video anc pil System devices Scan for hardware changes a 334 Launches the Update Driver Software Wizard for the selected devi Properties V Continued on next page Select Computer Management and double click it Right click Unknown device in Device Manager and select Update Driver Software When the USB driver cannot be specified because more than one Unknown device exists right click Unknown device and select Properties The Unknown device whose Hardware Ids is USB VID_06D3 amp PID_1800 on the lt lt Details gt gt tab of the properties screen is the update target Details General Driver B Unknown device Property Hardware Ids Value USB VID_06D38PID_18008REV_0100 USB VID_06D38PID_1800 Continued from previous page 7 6 How do you want to search for driver software gt Search automatically for upda
49. in this section a Settings with PLC parameters Operating procedure 1 Start GX Works2 2 Select Parameter gt PLC parameter in the project list 3 Click the lt lt PLC system 2 gt gt tab in the FX parameter screen FX Parameter es Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System 2 peral The setting contents are deared when unchecked Y Communication When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc Setting the D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 deared and must be unchecked Protocol Non Procedural vf T Control Line Data Length HM Type Tait gt Regular RS 232C gt Parity Control Mode oda Invalid Stop Bit Bit Y E Transmission Speed 9600 es Form Without CR LF z Station Number Setting TF Header 00 H 00H 0FH Time Out Judge Time I Terminator 1 X 10ms 1 255 Print Window _Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel 4 Set the items on the screen Item Description Operate communication setting Set whether to enable the communication setting Protocol Select the communication protocol Data length Select the data length Parity Select the parity Stop bit Select the stop bit Transmission speed Select the transmission speed H W type Select the cable type used in the communication Sum check Add the sum check
50. lt Set no external line gt Mov K255 D10 lt Set line type Mov K1 D11 lt Writes the connection data TO HO HIB2A D0 K40 Vv Continued on next page 217 Continued from previous page AS lt Set registration data bytes To HO H1B52 K80 K1 lt Set telephone number sMov 3 E D1 lt Set no external line Mov K255 D10 lt Set line type mov K1 D11 lt Writes the connection data TO HO H1B53 DO K40 Convert the initialization command into pulse lt Initialization command into puls 461 PLS M31 Turning Initiali jon alway zation c p ommand i nto puls lt Set the Data for initialization M31 M30 483 TOP HO H34 K2012 K1 fInitiali Initiali zation c zation e mmand i nabled to puls lt Turn on initialization request SET Y10 J Initiali zation r equest lt Turn on initial request flag SET M39 Initial request flag lt Turn on initialize completion Y10 x10 543H SET M3 Initiali Initiali Initiali ation r zation c zation c quest ompletio ompletio n n flag lt Turn off initialization request RST Y10 Initiali zation r equest 582 END 218 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE b FXCPU A sequence program is required for the use of FXCPU The modem initialization command is set in D1000 D1025 The AT command of ATEOSO 2Q1 amp D0 amp M4 Q0
51. station number 2 on network number 2 is accessed Logical station number of 11 is used 189 2 Checking the MELSECNETIH board Check whether the personal computer is connected properly to MELSECNET H Operating procedure r BE MELSECNET H utility ke Board ist Board information Loop monitor Each sta status Er history monitor Memory I O Test Target gt Channel 51 MELSECNET H 1 slot Own Station Information Routing Param Setting Network No Group No Sta No Control Normal Sta I p fo 3 h a Normal sta Zi Routing Param Transfer LED MNET H optical fiber Board Set RUN 8 8 O MNG TE g awe g 8 T PASS Online auto reconnection vj ar BB oc m AE i E b ofa Geom ol me T H X R UNDER 0 unpen A INNET H mode X LJ oor e LOOP LU SD Q Q SD RD 8 AD F LOOP Device Monitor En Help E d r gt MELSECNET H Routing Parameter Setting Data Setting Transfer to Intermediate Intermediate No Network No Network No StaNo f a ep 3 f 3 PR 3 Setting Data No Transfer to Network No Intermediate Network No Intermediate Sta E 1 a Shane Delete Channel 51 MELSECNET H 1 slot y T Composition only of MELSECNET H network OK Cancel Help Memory 1 0 Test Target 4 gt Routing Param Setting
52. 104 91 0L 279 10 16 2 Accessible ranges 280 This section indicates the accessible ranges for GOT transparent communication Point For usable system configuration refer to GOT1000 series connection manual 1 Personal computer side port Serial GOT1000 side port Serial CPU side port Direct connection a Configuration Relayed module Connected Gor Serial station CPU Serial Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion 1 LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control 3 4 x 3 x CC IE Field o e 2 QCPU Q mode 4 MELSECNET H O O x x O x Q motion CPU 2 Ethernet O x x x O x Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x es 2 3 4 5 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU Relayed stations cannot be accessed through Q motion CPU Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC
53. 232ADP FX36 232 BD FX36 FX 232CAB 2 FX3c CNV ADP FX3u 232ADP FXon 232ADP FX2n CNV BD F2 232CAB 2 e FXon FX2n 232 BD Half pitch 14 pin FX 232CAB 2 FXe2nc 232ADP FX2n CNV BD FXon 232ADP F2 232CAB 2 FXinc FX2nc FXe2nc 232ADP FX 232CAB 2 FXon 232ADP FX1n CNV BD F2 232CAB 2 FXis FXin FXin 232 BD FX 232CAB 2 FX2nc 232ADP FXin CNV BD FXsu 232 BD FXsu FX3uc 7 F2 232CAB 1 Function expansion board FX3u BD FX3u 232ADP FX3c 232 BD FX36 F2 232CAB 1 FX3c CNV ADP FX3u 232ADP FXon 232ADP FX2n CNV BD F2 232CAB y FXon FXe2n 232 BD 25 pin D sub F2 232CAB 1 FXe2nc 232ADP FX2n CNV BD FXon 232ADP F2 232CAB FXinc FXe2nc FXe2nc 232ADP F2 232CAB 1 FXon 232ADP FXin CNV BD F2 232CAB FXis FXin FXin 232 BD F2 232CAB 1 FX2anc 232ADP FXin CNV BD 1 of the function expansion board FX3U BD indicates 232 485 422 USB or CNV The serial communication is also available for FX3u 485 BD For setting for the serial communication refer to the following section gt Page 137 Section 8 1 1 2 FX extended port 42 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Point PLC parameter When Operate Communication Setting is selected on the lt lt PLC System 2 gt gt tab of PLC parameter the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU Write the setting in which Operate Communication Setting is cleared from the built in programming port of the p
54. 25 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on I gt Page 221 4 in this section E 5 Communication Setting Wizard a g i a 5 Page 223 5 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly 1 Complete 1 If normal communication cannot be performed refer to Flowchart for When Access cannot be Performed during Modem Communication Page 317 Appendix 6 and take corrective action 209 1 System examples The following system examples are used in this section lt Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 gt Q series compatible C24 Q25HCPU L series compatible C24 Station No 0 Logical station i seen Pushbutton dialing line tone number of 15 is used Personal computer MX Component COM1 is used m lt FXCPU gt gt Personal computer MX Component COM1 is used FX2NC 2 Setting the switch of Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 Setting Item Setting value b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Switch 1 CH1 communication speed CH1 transmission setting 0762H Switch 2 CH1 communications protocol 0005H Switch 3 CH2 communication speed CH2 transmission setting 00004 Switch 4 CH2 communications protocol 000
55. Administrative Tools gt Local Security Policy When user account control is enabled the following screen is displayed Click the button or Yes button lt Windows Vista gt lt Windows 7 gt User Account Control us W User Account Control Dere ces 82010 05 PM If you started this action continue pa z Microsoft Management Console Microsoft Windows a Program name Microsoft Management Console Verified publisher Microsoft Windows Y Show details Y Det User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer A 2 Select Local Policies gt User Rights Assignment es E XOslam Ea Security Settings Policy a Security Setting Z T Account Policies in the tree structure and double click Debug Access Credential Manager as a trusted caller a ae ae Access this computer from the network Everyone Administrators p rog rams udit Poli Ga User a a Act as part of the operating system T Security Options E Add workstations to domain E Windows Firewall with Advanced Seci El Adjust memory quotas for a process LOCAL SERVICENETWO Allow log on locali Guest Administrators Us E Network List Manager Policies E Public Key Policies Allow log on through Remote Desktop Services Administrators Remote l Software Restriction Policies Back up files and directories Administrators Backup IA Application Control Policies E Bypass traverse chec
56. C24 E HA Q mode Serial communication on x O x x x NN N CC Link O O O x x x gt 9 Multi drop connection R g 03 x O x x x ao Independent mode 4 9 3 Zo CC IE Field O x O x x x as Q MELSECNET H x x x x x x 2 Ethernet x x x x x a g LCPU L series compatible C24 Serial communication on x O x x x S CC Link O O O x x x Multi drop connection ok x O x x x Independent mode 4 1 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and QSCPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 3 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 4 Indicates the CH2 side setting The CH1 side is fixed to the independent mode 273 2 When using FXCPU 274 a Configuration Connected Relayed station CPU module ai Modem Relayed network Subscriber line Relayed zA Modem station CPU Relayed module Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected St
57. CPU 2 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 3 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 5 Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No lt IP information system 291 11 Personal computer side port Serial GOT1000 side port Serial CPU side port CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module a Configuration station CPU Network module module CC Link IE Field Network aa Ethernet adapter module Ethernet GOT Serial z Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed Connected Roan IE Field Relayed Relayed station Relayed CPU module all The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible
58. Click the C button ae wo The settings are displayed in the Data Type column mn D 5 0 Sc 32 a lt o o a 123 124 Setting arrays for data type Define a data type as an array To define a data type as an array set the items of Array Element on the Type Selection screen Operating procedure 1 2 3 4 Click on the data type entry field of the system label list or the structure setting Select the check box under Array Element Set Element One Dimension and if necessary set Element Two Dimension Element Three Dimension Set the data type of the array element in the same manner as setting the normal data type Type Class Simple Types S 5 Structure T Array Element VI ARRAY A Element One Dimension E Data Type Y Word Signed Double Word Signed Word Unsigned Bit 16bit Double Word Unsigned Bit 32Bit FLOAT Single Precision FLOAT Double Precision String Time Timer Counter Retentive Timer o coma CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 3 Assigning devices to structured data type labels Screen display Click Detail Setting on the Device column of System Label List Label1 Structured 1 Label Name Data Type Device LABELI DW1 LABELI TJI LABEL1_M1 String 33 LABEL1_J1 B LABEL1_W2 LABEL1_B3 Bit Operating procedure 7 Set the items on the screen Item Des
59. Details E A E Device Monitor Load le Savefie Help Es New Check complete 5 Clickthe button to exit from the utility 171 3 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Please select the PC side VF PC side VF CC Link board Communication setting 1st module Ed Board No 172 Please select the Network Station type Other station Single M Continued on next page Start Communication Setup Utility and click the Enter 7 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Board No CC Link board Ist module Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Other station Single CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page Please select the Other station Other station setting CPU type Q02 H bd Multiple CPU None A Cancel f e E Finis Communical ng Wizard Finished 6 The Communicat
60. FX2nc FX36 FX3u and FX3uc Q motion CPU Generic term for Q172 Q173 Q172H Q173H Q172D Q173D Q172DS and Q173DS QSCPU Abbreviation for a safety CPU module QS001CPU C Controller CPU Abbreviation for Q12DCCPU V Programmable controller CPU Generic term for ACPU Q mode LCPU FXCPU Q motion CPU QSCPU and C Controller CPU Q series compatible C24 Generic term for QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 and QJ71C24N R4 L series compatible C24 Generic term for LJ71C24 and LJ71C24 R2 FX extended port Generic term for FXon 485ADP FX2nc 485ADP FX1n 485 BD FX2n 485 BD FX3c 485 BD FX3u 485 BD and FX3u 485ADP Serial communication module Generic term for Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 and FX extended port Q series compatible E71 Generic term for QJ71E71 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 100 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module Abbreviation for NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module CC Link G4 module Abbreviation for AJ65BT G4 S3 GPP function peripheral connection module GOT Abbreviation for Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 Abbreviation for Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 series 19 Term Description Serial communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using the serial communication module Ethernet communication Abbreviation fo
61. FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control 2 S 2 x x CC IE Field S a 2 9 ee bie MELSECNET H 4 O O x O x x SCPU aa Ethernet O x x O x x oo Q motion CPU Serial communication O s x O x O x N 7 23 CC Link O O O x O x 30 a Q CC IE Control 2 E x x x x x x a5 CC IE Field ox 3 m MELSECNET H x x x x x x a9 Q12DCCPU V 83 Ethernet x x x x x x 3 Serial communication x x x x x x 2 CC Link O O O x O x S 4 Relayed stations cannot be accessed through QSCPU Q motion CPU S 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and QSCPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not O supported 3 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported S 4 Accessible when the MELSECNET H module of the connected station is in the MELSECNET H mode e 5 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base S 265 10 10 For CC Link IE Field Network Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for CC Link IE Field Network communication 10 10 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for CC Link IE Field Network communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU or own board Access Target Device Device Name QCPU e Own Q12DCCPU V LCPU QascpPu FXCPU Q mode board Function input FX O x Function ou
62. FXCPU does not feature the PAUSE switch as the programmable controller CPU an error is returned if remote pause is specified in SetCpuStatus Note that specifying the first I O number of a non existing module and executing the WriteBuffer method will not return an error For the index registers Z V of FXCPU data cannot be written to 2 or more consecutive points using WriteDeviceBlock Data may be written to only one point 4 Serial communication function of QO0UJ Q00 Q00U Q01 Q01U Q02UCPU 4 In this section serial communication function compatible CPU indicates QOO0UJ Q00 Q00U Q01 Q01U Q02UCPU When the following conditions are all satisfied communication between the personal computer and the serial communication function compatible CPU is set at 9600bps speed The serial communication function of the connected CPU is valid The transmission speed settings differ between the personal computer and the serial communication function compatible CPU side To increase the communication speed match the transmission speed of personal computer with that of serial communication function compatible CPU 5 6 Considerations for using built in Ethernet port CPU When resetting the programmable controller CPU during TCP IP connection establishment during opening using MX Component a communication error or receive error occurs at subsequent communication In this case perform the close processing in the applicati
63. J0aW is set lt A H41 is set in D1000 M8002 o MOV H41 D1000 lt T H54 is set in D1001 MOV H54 D1001 lt E H45 is set in D1002 MOV H45 D1002 lt 0 H30 is set in D1003 MOV H30 D1003 lt S H53 is set in D1004 gt MOV H53 D1004 lt 0 H30 is set in D1005 MOV H30 D1005 lt H3D is set in D1006 MOV H3D D1006 lt 2 H32 is set in D1007 gt MOV H32 D1007 lt Q H51 is set in D1008 MOV H51 D1008 lt 1 H31 is set in D1009 MOV H31 D1009 lt amp H26 is set in D1010 gt MOV H26 D1010 lt D H44 is set in D1011 MOV H44 D1011 0 lt 0 H30 is set in D1012 a a a MOV H30 D1012 z xy E 2 3 Continued on next page y S o 33 int 25 Point 3 8 This sample sequence program is installed into the following folders after installation of MX Component S User specified folder Act Samples GppW FXCPUTEL 219 Continued from previous page VY lt amp H26 is set in D1013 66 MOV H26 D1013 lt M H4D is set in D1014 MOV H4D D1014 lt 4 H34 is set in D1015 MOV H34 D1015 lt H5C is set in D1016 MOV HSC D1016 lt Q H51 is set in D1017 MOV H51 D1017 lt 0 H30 is set in D1018 MOV H30 D1018 lt H5C is set in D1019 MOV HSC D1019 lt J H
64. JO4 GL OL 277 10 16 For GoT Transparent Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for GOT transparent communication 10 16 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for GOT transparent communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Function input FX O x x x Function output FY O x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O x x Special register SD O O O x x Input relay X O O O x O Output relay Y O O O x O Internal relay M O O O x O Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O x x Edge relay V O x O x x Link relay B O x O x x Data register D O O O x O Link register W O x O x x Contact TS O x O x O a Coil TC O x O x O Present value TN O x O x O Contact TS O x O x O a Coil TC O x O x O Present value TN O x O x O Retentive Contact TS O x O x x timer Coil TC O x O x x ST Present value TN O x O x x Link special relay SB O x O x x Link special register SW O x O x x Step relay S x x x x O Direct input DX x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x Continued on next page 278 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES
65. Local Policies gt A Audit Policy gt Ex Security Options gt El Public Key Policies Ej User Rights Assignment b El Windows Firewall with Advanced Sec E Network List Manager Policies E Shutdown Clear virtual memory pagefile Policy Security Setting Ei Network security Restrict NTLM NTLM authentication in th E Network security Restrict NTLM Outgoing NTLM traffic to E Recovery console Allow automatic administrative logon Es Recovery console Allow floppy copy and access to all drives E Shutdown Allow system to be shut down without having to E System cryptography Force strong key protection for user k b El Software Restriction Policies Ei System cryptography Use FIPS compliant algorithms for Application Control Policies 5 System objects Require case insensitivity for non Windows gt 18 PP Security Policies on Local Compute ii System objects Strengthen default permissions of internal s b E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration E System settings Optional subsystems E System settings Use Certificate Rules on Windows Executabl ls User Account Control Admin Approval Mode for the Built iser Account Control Allow UlAccess applications to pror E User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt fe E User Account Control Detect application installations and E User Account Control Only elevate executables that are sign E User Account Control Onl
66. Organize gt EJOpen Bum dns Name Date modified Type HE Desktop 1B Downloads El Recent Places 2009 07 1413 46 Shortcut 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut 2009 07 1413 42 Shortcut 3 Libraries fa SCSI Initiator 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut E Documents Local Security Policy 2010 03 17 544 Shortcut a Music Performance Monitor 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut Pictures td Print Management 2010 03 17 5 43 Shortcut E Videos Bl Services 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut System Configuration 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut Task Scheduler 2009 07 1413 42 Shortcut I Windows Firewall with Advanced Security 2009 07 14 13 41 Shortcut Windows Memory Diagnostic 2009 07 1413 41 Shortcut Windows PowerShell Modules 2009 07 141352 Shortcut amp Component Services BY Computer Management 5 Computer Gin Network Date created 2010 03 17 5 44 Local Security Policy Date modified 2010 03 17 5 44 Shortcut Size 1 21 KB file Action View Help es EX Hm El Security Settings B Account Policies Local Policies El Windows Firewall with Advanced Seci l Network List Manager Policies El Public Key Policies E Software Restriction Policies Mins Pots gt E Application Control Policies Software Restriction Policies gt 8 P Security Policies on Local Compute El Application Control Policies gt l Advanced Audit Policy Configuration 9 IP Security Policies on Local Compu
67. Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU SSDINSP A AISSSDIY 8 0L UOpeo JUnumOO H LANOASTAW 404 8 04 261 10 8 2 Accessible ranges 262 This section indicates the accessible ranges for MELSECNET H communication 1 Configuration Hi y al ZERA Personal computer 2 Accessibility list MELSECNET H N Connected station CPU module Connected Relayed module Relayed network CPU Relayed station Relayed module The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs and own board MELSECNET H board are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 19 3 9 y S CC IE Field O dl 2 CPU d A oer an e MELSECNET H 4 O O E i x SCPU Q Ethernet O x x O x x Q motion CPU Serial communication O s x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H 4 x x x x x x Q12DCCPU V Ethernet x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Li
68. QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Z O x O x 01 2 Index register Vv x x x x O13 R Gs x O x x File register ZR oO x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output J Y O O O x x Link relay J B O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G on O O x O16 1 Accessible to FX3GCPU FX3u c CPU only 2 WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only 3 When accessing FX series CPU other than FX3GCPU and FX3u c CPU specify the data register D The file register R can be specified only when accessing FX3GCPU or FX3u c CPU 4 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 5 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 6 The device can be used to execute Read WriteDeviceRandom Read Write DeviceRandom2 Get SetDevice or Get SetDevice2 only when accessing FX3u c CPU 2 For own board access The following devices are usable only for own board access S S Device Device Name Remarks ES o Special relay SM Special relay of own board 8 8 Special register SD Special register o
69. Relayed network CPU Relayed station Relayed module The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station CPU Connected Module Relayed Network Relayed station CPU QCPU Q mode Q12DC CPU V LCPU QSCPU Q motion CPU FXCPU QCPU Q mode Q series compatible C24 CC IE Control CC IE Field O O N O wm x MELSECNET H Ethernet Serial communication CC Link O O x x x X X X x X X X XIXI XIX Q12DCCPU V Q series compatible C24 CC IE Control CC IE Field O lolx xlo N O wm x x x MELSECNET H Ethernet Serial communication CC Link x X X x x X X X X X X XxX LCPU L series compatible C24 CC IE Field 9 xo lx xlo x x x MELSECNET H Ethernet Serial communication CC Link OJO x x O O O x O O JOJO x O Ol xixi x OJO x x OO O O x x x XI XI X x X X x x X X x 1 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and QSCPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 295 seBue
70. Structured Data Types Logical Station Number G gt Regist N 5 2 System Label List I Label Description r 70 CAP NUM SCRL Continued on next page Select the set system label list name to display the system label list Set system label names data types and devices lt Page 122 Section 7 3 3 Right click Logical Station Number on the Navigation window and select Logical Station Number gt Regist lt Page 121 Section 7 3 2 Select a logical station number and click the C _ button 57 Page 121 Section 7 3 2 For setting the communication settings click the Communication settings button and set the settings with Communication Setting Wizard lt Page 95 Section 7 1 6 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS Continued from previous page ros The logical station number is displayed on the aes Set the communication settings and associated LabelSpace N avigation window 7 D Menu gt Save LabelSpace lt Page 119 Section 7 3 1 MXLabelManager Refresh system label data for Control R Logical Station Number G gt ere gt The system label is registered Export ite System Label gt Exit Alt F4 Description XLabelManager Menu M Edit E Help H 8 YD Menu gt Refresh system label data for Control Add LabelSpace N Tf you want to register a new reference to a diff
71. VS 2621A Matsushita Electric 7D7 2007 ATE1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp K3 amp S1S0 1 VC 173 7D8h 2008 ATE1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp K3 amp S0S0 1 Omron MT128B D 7D9n 2009 ATE1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D1 Q2 amp S0S0 1 Sun Electronic TS128JX 7DAu 2010 ATE1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D2 Q3 amp S0S0 1 Sharp DN TA1 7DCu 2012 AT8S0S0 1 General Use this device for operation check If the device does not operate create the 7DDh 2013 ATX1 amp S0S0 1 initialization command which matches the modem specifications on the user side 211 1 When callback function is not used Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting Modem connection channel designation 2Ex 1 CH1 GX Developer connection designation 36x 1 Connected Initialization data number designation 34H 2006 No 2006 Callback function designation 2001 Initial processing lt Turn on QJ71C24 accesible X1E X1F of wo J71C24 WDT erro QJ71C24 ready E accessib de lt Turn on initialization enabled gt MO M3 x10 x12 x13 Y10 i eaa aa a Ia w30 J71C24 Initiali Initiali Connecti Abnormal Initiali Initiali faccessib zation c zation c on in pr complet zation r zation e fle ompletio ompletio ogress ion equest nabled n flag n lt Set modem connection channel No gt MO a3H TOP HO H2E K1 K1 ppI71C24 laccessib fle lt Set GX Developer connection gt TOP HO H36 K1 K1 Convert
72. Y Create a program using the functions supported by EXA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual corresponding controls Debug the program Yes using PLC Monitor Utility Y E Section 4 4 PLC Monitor Utility Operating Procedure Completion of user application ba Es MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual l LAN golseg ensia Buisn uaym LEY s np 201dq Buea uoneaddy Jasn oy 63 4 3 2 When using Visual C NET The following describes the creation procedures when using Visual C NET Power on the personal computer and start Windows Install MX Component Version 4 L CHAPTER 3 Program setting type Select the setting type Utility setting type Use labels ues No Start Communication Setup Utility and set the communication Sedion 74 settings by following the instructions of wizard mies Sewn CHAPTER 8 Start Visual C NET Add controls to Visual C NET 4 Create a form and paste the controls ActUtIType Define the pasted controls as dialog members using Class Wizard Set the property logical station number of the pasted controls 3 CHAPTER 8 y Create a program using the functions supported by corresponding controls
73. a Workspace W gt T PR Export o a es or 36 Description a 2 o Mm x Q r O car num SCRE El Oo L 5 o 2 Registration complete 15 5 1 2 Utilizing labels used in MELSOFT Navigator Refer a system label from existing Workspace and register it with Label Utility Operating procedure 1 Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Application gt MX Component gt Label Utility gt Label Utility starts Menu M Edit E Help H Pr Register the system labeled with the following procedure abelSpace i Skat the LabelSp E N fa register Logical Station Number pisar Nana 3 To register System Label Reference Workspace F Logical Station Number FE Structured Data Types BE System Label List Description car num scr 2 Right click Undefined_name on the LabelSpace Menu M Edit E Help H If you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace ainia aS window and select Rename LabelSpace ans Page 119 Section 7 3 1 Change the LabelSpace name Reference Workspace BB Logical Station Number FE Structured Data Types YE System Label List Description m J car num scr COTE 3 Right click Structured Data Types on the If you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace on Navigation window and sele
74. and Scan Windows Media Center Windows Media Player El Windows Update 6 Run as administrator A XPS Viewer p Ainai Troubleshoot compatibility B Games Open file location Maintenance Pin to Taskbar D meLsec Pin to Start Menu I MELSOFT Application and select Run as administrator for execution GX Developer Restore previous versions To MELFANSweb Homepa Send to gt I GT Works3 I GX Works2 Cut LJ MELSOFT iQ Works Copy MT Works2 ED MX Component Delete gt Communication Setup penmi Label Utility TB PLC Monitor Utility Ee eee Ju Ji PX Developer I RT ToolBox2 Help and Support Back Windows Security 4 m ma Pea amal Search programs and files 9 Togo lt Windows 7 gt For administrator users the message shown on the left is displayed 2 Select C button or Allow to execute a program with the administrator authority Program name ActComm exe Publisher Unknown File origin Hard drive on this computer Select button or Cancel to cancel the Y Show details execution en these notifications a lt Windows Vista gt Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before E ActComm exe Unidentified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Det
75. be registered Set the value to be entered when a word device is specified Item Description Value DEC Set to decimal HEX Set to hexadecimal Set the display format when a word device is specified EEE button Item Description bay 16bit integer Set to the 16 bit integer display Display 16bit integer Es 32bit integer Set to the 32 bit integer display ose Display Real number a a pe Set to the real number single precision display single precision Real b ates E P Set to the real number double precision display double precision ASCII character Set to the ASCII character string display button Register the device Close button Close the dialog box Delete device button Delete the device to be monitored Clear device button Delete all devices registered in device entry monitor from the monitor screen Start montor button _Stop monttor_ button Start stop monitor Continued on next page 114 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS Item Description 1 Monitor screen Display the device status The Write to Device screen is displayed by clicking the device name Page 116 Section 7 2 5 flickers under the scroll button during monitoring 2 Target CPU name Display the communication target CPU name specified on Communication Setting Wizard 3 Communication path information Display such
76. click the LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window and select Delete LabelSpace CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 3 2 Registering deleting logical station numbers 1 Registration Register a logical station number to LabelSpace Operating procedure e Select a LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window Menu gt Logical Station Number gt Regist e Selecta LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window right click Logical Station Number on the Navigation window and select Logical Station Number gt Regist Screen display Regist Logical Station Number Es Logical Station Number Communication Settings cancel Item Description Logical Station Number Select the logical station number defined on Communication Setup Utility from the list box Communication Settings button Start Communication Setup Utility button Register the logical station number and close the screen cancel button Close the screen without registering the logical station number 2 Deletion Delete the logical station number registered to LabelSpace Aman leqe7 eZ Operating procedure e Select the station number to be deleted from the Navigation window gt Menu gt Logical Station Number gt Deregist e Right click the station number to be deleted from the Navigation window and select Logical Station Number gt Deregist sJequunu uole s eoio Bunajep
77. communication used be complicated however it is simplified by using the common functions When applying any of the following program examples to the actual system examine the applicability and confirm that no problem will occur in the system control 1 2 Features 1 Support of a wide range of communication paths for programmable controller A wide range of communication paths to the programmable controller are supported to enable the user to configure up a system as desired 2 Substantial improvement in user s development efficiency MX Component comes with the wizard type Communication Setup Utility By simply setting dialog based communication settings on the screen the user can achieve communication settings to access the programmable controller CPU to communicate with Once the communication settings are set stations can be accessed by merely specifying the logical station number of the programmable controller CPU stored on Communication Setup Utility 3 Save and read of communication settings MX Component features the functions to save and read the communication settings set on Communication Setup Utility The set data can easily be moved from the personal computer used for development to that used for operation Note MX Component must be installed in both the personal computer used for development and the actually used personal computer Communication Personal computer setting data are Personal computer used for developm
78. confirmed that no error occurs after the installation When the message on the left is displayed installation is complete 10 Click the button to close the screen When the following screen is displayed select Yes want to restart my computer now Setup has finished copying files to your computer Before you can use the program you must restart Windows or your computer Choose one of the following options and click OK to finish setup Yes want to restart my computer now No will restart my computer later 99 be uoneljelsu 2 When message is displayed at start of installation The following explains the countermeasures when the message is displayed at start of installation a When starting the installation of this product the This package is not in proper operating environment message is displayed disabling normal completion of installation In such a case close all applications and install EnvMEL lt Installation of EnvMEL gt Execute SETUP EXE in the EnvMEL folder within the product CD ROM After executing SETUP EXE install the product When user account control is enabled the following screen is displayed Click the button or Allow lt Windows 7 gt lt Windows Vista gt Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name SETUP EXE Publisher Unknown A 1 SETUP EXE File origin CD DVD drive Unid
79. example of a personal computer and FX 485PC IF converter with the RS 232 cable personel Cable Connection and Signal Direction FX 485PC IF side Computer side Connection example for full duplex half duplex Signal Name communication Signal Name Pin number SD TXD SD TXD 2 RD RXD Ma es RD RXD 3 RS RTS RS RTS 4 CS CTS a CS CTS 5 DR DSR DR DSR 6 SG GND e gt SG GND 7 ER DTR ER DTR 20 2 Connection example of the FX 485PC IF converter and the FX extended port 2 pair wiring FX1n 485 BD FX2n 485 BD FX3c 485 BD FX3u 485 BD FXanc 485ADP FX 485PC IF FX3u 485ADP FXon 485ADP FXon 485ADP SDA R 1 RDA R 1 RDB 7 LINK SG FG Grounding sa R_ indicates a terminal resistance The terminal resistances must be installed at both ends of the circuit For 2 pair wiring use the terminal resistance of 3309 1 4W For FXsc 485 BD FX3u 485 BD and FX3u 485ADP terminal resistances are built in Set the terminal resistance by the setting switch For FXon 485ADP FX1n 485 BD FX2n 485 BD and FX2nc 485ADP use the provided terminal resistances 2 Ground the shields connected to FXin 485 BD FX2n 485 BD FX2nc 485ADP FX3c 485 BD FX3u 485 BD FX3u 485ADP 3 Connect the FG terminal to the ground terminal of the grounded programmable controller 314 APPENDIX Appendix 4 muiti cPU Syste
80. extended port FXs3u 485 BD SWO UONEdIUNWWOD JO SIIBISQ ZZZ WJO4 uogosuuog yoeg JO asf JO UONeANBiuO Wajs s zz 35 2 About connection of applicable modules When accessing the programmable controller CPU from a personal computer via serial communication modules note that modules that can be connected to the personal computer are limited Even if a module cannot be directly connected to the personal computer it may be applicable as the nth module in multi dropped connection j Multi dropped connection Model Interface 1 1 system configuration 1st module nth module QJ71C24N RS 232 CH1 O O x QJ71C24 RS 422 485 CH2 x x O RS 232 CH1 O x x QJ71C24 R2 O QJ71C24N R2 RS 232 CH2 x Function version B or later RS 422 485 CH1 x x O QJ71C24N R4 RS 422 485 CH2 x O RS 232 CH1 O O x LJ71C24 RS 422 485 CH2 x x O RS 232 CH1 O x x LJ71C24 R2 RS 232 CH2 O x x FXon 485ADP FX2nc 485ADP FXsu 485ADP FX1n 485 BD RS 422 485 O O O FX2n 485 BD FXs3c 485 BD FX3u 485 BD O Applicable x Not applicable O Switch settings of the serial communication module For the switch settings for the use of MX Component refer to the following section K Page 133 Section 8 1 1 Settings of serial communication modules O Cable for connection For the connection cable refer to the manual of serial communication module For cable pin assignment refer to the following appendix
81. following items and click the Next gt Please select the PLC side VF button PLC side VF CPU module X a E e PLC side I F CPU module kara e CPUt Q02 H eas CET ype Q02 H Transmission speed 19200 Control DTR or RTS Control Continued on next page 163 Continued from previous page Please select the Network Station type Other station Y Network MELSECNET 10 H y Network route Mode MELSECNETIH y The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment CPU COM_Sample 7 Registration complete 164 5 7 Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Other station Network MELSECNET 10 H Mode MELSECNET H Set the following items and click the next gt button CPU type Q02 H Network No 15 Station No 75 Multiple CPU None Enter a comment and click the button CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the CPU COM communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure Ey Communication Setup Utility Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 5 CPU COM_Sample Serial PC UF comas Time out 1
82. information as the network type network number start I O address and station number 4 Logical station number Display the logical station number set for the utility setting type This number is not displayed when the program setting type is used Point O When monitoring the setting values of the timers and counters indirectly specify the data registers O Devices cannot be monitored if the connection destination is not established O The transfer settings cannot be set during monitoring 115 qe a9meg Aug uo uvonelado yz AMAN JOHUON Did ZL 7 2 5 Operations on Write to Device screen This screen is used to change the ON OFF of a bit device or the present value of a word device or buffer memory Operating procedure e Online gt Device write e Double click the monitor screen of the corresponding tab Device write cannot be selected when QSCPU is connected Screen display Write to Device Bit device Close Force ON Device Force OFF Toggle force Word device Buffer memory Device C Buffer memory Module start VO HEX Address HEX Setting value 16bit integer y Dec y Set Item Description Device Enter the device name Force ON button Forcibly change the specified device to the ON status Bit device Force OFF button Forcibly change the specified device to the OFF status Forcibly change the specified device from the ON to OFF status or f
83. ir iommunication Setup Utility Menu Help Target setting JList view Connection test Logical station number v lejos Communication Setting Wizard PC side Please select the PC side VF a Communication setting Connect port COM1 5 10000 ms Time out No Notation Description Example O Underline Screen name Communication Setup Utility screen J Menu name on menu bar Menu gt Target setting lt lt gt gt Tab name on screen lt lt Targer setting gt gt tab S Item name on screen PC side I F p Button on screen ox button L Keyboard key key TERMS This manual uses the terms listed in the following table unless otherwise noted Term Description MX Component Generic product name for SWnDNC ACT E and SWnDNC ACT EA n version EA indicates a volume license product Personal computer Generic term for personal computers on which Windows operates PC CPU module Abbreviation for MELSEC Q series compatible PC CPU module CONTEC CO LTD product GX Developer Generic product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n version EA indicates a volume license product and EV an updated product GX Works2 Generic product name for SWnDNC GXW2 n version MELSOFT Navigator Product name for the integrated d
84. names to select examples Advanced Select Users or Groups Select this abject type Users or Builtin security principals Object Types From this location MX PC Locations AAA Common Queries top S Cancel Name RDN In Folder G HelpAssistant MX PC EBINTERACTIVE e ME EF LOCAL SERV EP NETWORK EF NETWORK S ER REMOTE INT AR SERVICE Select Users or Groups Select this object type A Users or Builtin security principals Object Types Erom this location MX PC Locations Enter the object names to select examples IUSR Advanced a Setting complete Cancel Check Names 6 If the computer name name of the computer where Internet Information Service is set is not displayed in Locations select the computer name After confirming the above setting click the button Click the button and select the IUSR_Name Internet Server Anonymous Access account from the Name list box and click the button After checking that the account is added restart the personal computer APPENDIX 2 When using Windows Vista or Windows 7 When the Active Server Pages ASP pages using MX Component are released the IUSR must be given the Debug programs right Set the settings in the following procedure Operating procedure 1 UD Start gt Control Panel gt
85. number 15 Modem_Sample y Delete ES 8 PC UF coma Module type 0371024 Time out 110000 ms CPU type 25H Transmission speed 19200 bps Station No J Modem CE Muttiple CPU None Connect way Auto line connect Line type fone Call number a Co Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 15 Modem_Sample Y Test 5 Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count o Result CPU name Mean time of communication pa 4 Click Communication test complete 1 2 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 15 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 15 Click the Test communication is being performed normally button to check that If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical sta
86. on CC Link setting screen Set the start I O number type total number of modules connected and station information Set other setting items as required lt CC Link parameter setting screen gt Number of Modules 1 Boards Blank No Setting Set the station information in the CC Link configuration window a pe Master station rl Mester Staten Datatype Se A fis ee lt Station information setting screen gt Intelligent device station at station type also includes local station and standby master station CI creck ed comet After setting the CC Link parameters write them to the programmable controller CPU 178 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE b Setting parameter setting in sequence program The parameter setting items for data link and the sequence program example are described below lt Parameter setting items gt Address Item Description Setting value Number of 1h Set the number of modules on the remote local stations connected 1h connected modules 20H Station information AJ65BT G4 S3 21014 lt Sequence program gt x0 XOF 0 PLS MO MO 5 SET M1 lt Number of connected modules gt M1 7 TOP HO H1 H1 K1 lt Station Infomation gt TOP HO H20 H2101 K1 SET Y6 X6 27 RST Y6 SET M1 30 END Point This sample sequence program is ins
87. perform communication if a remote password is set to the connected station side Q series compatible E71 3 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 287 seBue e qissadoy Z 91 0L uoHeoiuNWWOD JuaJedsuel 109 104 9L 0L 8 Personal computer side port USB GOT1000 side port USB CPU side port Q series compatible E71 a Configuration Connected Connected Relayed station CPU module module Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module Ethernet Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module 4 LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 3 4 x x x CC IE Field 2 a pees MELSECNET H O O x x x x Q mode Q series compatible E71 Ethernet O SE z gt 7 T QSCPU Serial communication O x Q x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 Inaccessible to Redunda
88. provides the CPU USB communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 6 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using CPU USB communication Connect the programmable controller CPU and personal computer K Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Install the USB driver Page 328 Appendix 10 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard ES Page 167 2 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section 5 Page 169 3 in this section r 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 y o HOTA JHE Personal computer y MX Component USB Q02H Normal station port is used CPU Sta No 8 Logical station number of 6 is used 166 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time t
89. set is 60 4 Click the button The phone number is registered Comment Screen button Item Description Create a new group New group button The Group setting screen is displayed by clicking the __Newsroup button Enter a group name The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50 Edit the registered data Edit button Select a registered data to be edited on the list of registered phone numbers The Call number setting screen is displayed by clicking the Edit button Edit the data Copy a registered phone number to another group Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered phone numbers ES Button The Group screen is displayed by clicking the Copy button Select the group to which data is pasted and click the button Move a registered phone number to another group Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered phone numbers A bution The Group screen is displayed by clicking the _ Move group button Select the group to which data is moved and click the button Delete a registered group and phone number Data cannot be deleted in bulk in group unit Delete button Search for a registered phone number The search condition is a partial match Target data is searched from all registered data AIN dnyes voyeojunuoo pZ u 19S BUI JOBUUOD UO suonelado 7 12 Find AR button When entering search conditions to both Des
90. setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 4 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 4 Click the Tet button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 161 ainpasoid ssad9y y 8 jnpow Jajdepy J9u19UI3 MOMION Pl9ly Jl AUN IO BUISA USYM uoeounWWOD zaua 8 8 5 CPU COM Communication This section provides the CPU COM communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 5 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using CPU COM communication Connect the programmable controller CPU and personal computer ES Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard 5 Page 165 3 in this section On the communication test screen check
91. table conversion system and combined system as the Station No lt IP information system 242 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported On the connected station side Q series compatible E71 always specify the station number set in the Ethernet parameter Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 3 3 Accessible ranges when using built in Ethernet port CPUs This section indicates the accessible ranges for Ethernet communication using the built in Ethernet port CPUs 1 Configuration Connected Relayed Ethernet a CPU module Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module Personal computer 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Point When using TCP IP on the built in Ethernet port CPU the Ethernet parameters are required to be set in the PLC parameter setting of GX Works2
92. the _ Move group button Select the group to which data is moved and click the button Delete button Delete a registered AT command Select button Perform a selection processing of AT command when referring from the Connect Line screen Read file button Write file button Read AT command from the specified file and add it to the directory To replace the commands with the read AT commands execute the read file function after deleting all AT commands Write data set on the AT command registration screen to the specified file Point The AT commands created using GX Developer can be read in MX Component The AT commands of GX Developer are stored in the following folders User specified folder Gppw 105 u 19S BUI JOBUUOD UO suonelado 7 12 AIN dnjes uoyesiunww0g 12 4 Details setting screen Set details for telephone line connection Set the settings according to the modem used Screen display Details setting Es Line connection CD signal wait time o seconds Line connection modem report wait time s Onde Line disconnection CD signal wait time s seconds Line disconnection delay time 3 encode Data transmission delay time fo seconds AT command response wait time fi seconds Password cancellation response wait time s seconds AT command password cancellation retry times 3 nee Line callback cancel wait time o seconds Call back delay time jo seconds
93. the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 8 11 MELSECNET H Communication This section provides the MELSECNET H communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 11 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using MELSECNET H communication Connect the personal computer to the MELSECNET H s Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Page 190 2 in this section Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard ES Page 191 3 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Page 193 4 in this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Normal station Sta No 1 ainpesoid ssa00V L1 8 UOHESIUNWWOD H LANOASTAW 118 Personal computer MX Component First MELSECNET H board is used QO6HCPU No 2 at normal station
94. the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 7 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for CC Link G4 communication 1 Configuration Connected CC Link Relayed station CPU module module Relayed network ll Ss CC Link Relayed station Relayed EA G4 module CPU module Personal computer 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network Paar pea ean eean Q es CDU CCIE Fi oF ee oF oF 3 QCPU Q mode MELSECNET H O O x O O x Q motion CPU Ethernet O x x O O x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x Sear o ajo o MELSECNET H O O x O O x la Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x CC IE Field x x x x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 1 Relayed stations cannot be accessed through Q motion CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU a
95. using Excel VBA If the page feed preview function is set in the application that uses Excel VBA a memory leak or operating system basic operation file operation printing or the like failure may occur 2 Considerations for using Microsoft Excel a Occasionally controls may not be pasted to Excel This symptom occurs if the cache file temporary file of Excel remains In such a case perform the operation in the following procedure Operating procedure 1 Close Excel 2 Delete exd in the Excel 8 0 folder of the temp folders 1 2 3 Restart Excel 1 The location of temp folder differs according to the operating system 2 When the corresponding folder and file are not displayed set the settings in the folder option setting to display all files and folders b Resizing of ACT control in Excel does not affect the operation of MX Component To restore the size set the Height and Width properties of ACT control to 24 10 Considerations for using Microsoft Access 1 Considerations for using Microsoft Access a When the ACT control is pasted to an Access form and the ACT control is double clicked or the custom control in the property is selected the following error message is displayed However this does not affect the operation of ACT control An error message other than the following message may be displayed Microsoft Access The operation on the MITSUBISHI ActUtIType Control ob
96. whether communication can be performed properly E Page 165 3 in this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section No 2 Sta y MELSECNET H Network No 5 Personal computer Y MX Component COM1 Q02H Normal station is used CPU Sta No 5 Logical station number of 5 is used 162 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button 2 Enter 5 in Logical station number and click the This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT Next gt button You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number 3 Set the following items and click the Next gt s button PC side VF Serial v nect port Mit fd oe E A PC side 1 F Serial Time out 10000 ms Connect port COM1 Time out 10000 einpesoid SSSIIY G 8 uonedsIuUnWWOD NOD NAO S 8 4 Setthe
97. x x Link special register SW O x O x x Step relay S x x x x O Direct input DX x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x Continued on next page 246 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Access target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Z O x O x o Index register V x x x x o l R OF x O x Os File register ZR o x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output J Y O O O x x Link relay J B O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G oO O O O os 1 WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only 2 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 3 When accessing FX series CPU other than FX3GCPU and FX3u c CPU specify the data register D The file register R can be specified only when accessing FX3GCPU or FX3u c CPU 4 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 5 The device can be used to execute Read WriteDeviceRandom Read Write DeviceRandom2 Get SetDevice or Get SetDevi
98. 0000 ms CPU type Transmission speed 19200 bps a02 H Control DTR or RTS CPU type a02 H Network No 5 Station No 5 Multiple CPU None F Communication Setup Utilit Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 5 CPU COM_Sample Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication H Click Communication test complete Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 5 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 5 Click the Tet button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 165 ainpssoid ssad9y 1 S g UOHEIIUNWWOD WOOD Ndd S 8 8 6 CPU USB Communication This section
99. 0H Switch 5 Module station number 0000H 1 Settings of CH1 and CH2 are indicated below b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 CH1 side CH2 side Setting Bit Description CH1 transmission CH2 transmission setting setting bO Operation setting 0 Independent 0 Independent b1 Data bit 1 8 0 7 b2 Parity bit 0 No 0 No b3 Odd even number parity 0 Odd number 0 Odd number b4 Stop bit 0 1 0 1 b5 Sum check code 1 Yes 0 No b6 Online change 1 Enable 0 Disable b7 Setting change 0 Disable 0 Disable 210 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Connect Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 or FXCPU and the modem a Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 Using the Q series compatible C24 or L series compatible C24 requires a sequence program to set the following buffer memory addresses The following table indicates the buffer memory addresses that must be set and the sequence program Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting 0 Not connected modem function is not used 1 CH1 side interface 2 CH2 side interface Modem connection channel designation 2En Initialization data number designation 34 1 Ou Send of initialization data specified in the sending user registration frame specifying area 7D0u to 7DDh Initialization data number GX Developer connection designation 36H 0 Not connected 1 Connected Callback function designati
100. 2 2 This tab is used to monitor the specified device Screen display Operations on Device Batch tab a h PLC Monitor Utility Menu Online Help Device Batch Buffer Memory Entry Device Device 0011 Do D2 o000 0000 0000 1000 D3 0000 0000 0000 1000 D4 0000 0000 0011 0101 5 DS 0000 0000 0001 1010 2 DE oooo 0000 0000 0000 gt A 07 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 D8 o0o00 0000 0000 0000 Letar montor D9 o000 0000 0000 0000 D10 0000 0000 0000 0000 Stop monitor D11 oooo 0000 0000 0000 Diz 0000 0000 0000 0000 Monitor format Bit amp Word D13 oooo 0000 0000 0000 D14 0000 0000 0000 0000 Display 16bit integer X Dis 0000 0000 0000 0000 z Data format DEC X Bit order FO E 2 3 4 Item Description Devi Enter the device name to be monitored in bulk evice f For the X and Y devices of FXCPU enter the device number in octal Start monitor button Start stop monitor Stop monitor button Monitor format Set the monitor format Item Description Bit amp Word Set the monitor screen to the bit and word display Bit Set the monitor screen to the bit display only Word Set the monitor screen to the word display only Display Item Set the display format of the device values to be displayed when the monitor format is Bit amp Word or Word Description 16bit integer Set to the 16 bit integer display 32bit integer
101. 2 2 e Contact TS O x x On S ar er Coil TC O x O x on E Present value TN O x O x o 8 Retentive Contact TS O x O x x S timer Coil TC O x O x x ST Present value TN O x O x x Link special relay SB O x O x x Link special register SW O x O x x Step relay S x x x x ot Direct input DX x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x 1 Only FX1sCPU FX1NCPU FX1NcCPU FX2NCPU FX2NcCPU FX3GCPU FX3ucCPU can be used Continued on next page 271 272 Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode 2 O x O x ei Index register V x x x x 9 R Os x O x G File register ZR O 3 x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output JAY O O O x x Link relay JAB Q O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G o O O x on igh bs 42 tg 4 5 6 Only FX1sCPU FX1NCPU FX1NCCPU FX2NCPU FX2NCCPU FX3GCPU FX3ucCPU can be used WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU When accessing FX series CPU other than FX3GCPU and FX3u c CPU specify the data register D The file regist
102. 485ADP Ethernet module Built in Ethernet port CPU Q12DCCPU V Q motion CPU CC Link IE Field Network module QCPU Q mode LCPU FXCPU Q motion CPU FXCPU FXo F Xos F Xon F X1s FX1n F X2n FX1nc F Xanc F X3c F X3u F X3uc QCPU Q mode Q12DCCPU V LCPU FXCPU FX3c Q motion CPU MELSECNET H module CC Link IE controller Network module CC Link IE Field Network module CC Link module Software version N or later CC Link module Software version N or later 33 suoneinByuos wayshS 1 72 WJO4 uogosuuog YIBY JO asf Jo uonenbyuog Wajs s zz 34 Personal computer GX Simulator communication GX Simulator2 communication Modem communication Gateway function communication GX Developer Version 5 GX Developer F E al Aereas bis offline debugging Sws5D5C LLT E 10B or later Must be purchased separately GX Works2 Version 1 Simulation function of GX Works2 SW1DNC GXW2 E or later GX Simulator2 Must be purchased separately Telephone line ER FXCPU ee Q series compatible C24 Modem Modem L series compatible C24 TOTTI Ethernet ool GOT Ethernet board GOT transparent USB RS 232 communication Ethernet Q series bus On the same base communication PC CPU module RS 232 RS 232 RS 422 RS 232 Bus connection Ethernet O o
103. 4A is set in D1020 MOV H4A D1020 lt 0 H30 is set in D1021 MOV H30 D1021 lt amp H26 is set in D1022 MOV H26 D1022 lt W H57 is set in D1023 MOV H57 D1023 lt CR HOD is set in D1024 MOV HOD D1024 lt LE HOA is set in D1025 MOV HOA D1025 132 END 220 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 4 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for Q series compatible C24 Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Please select the PC side VF PC side VF Modem Communication setting conectmodule farc gt Time out 10000 ms Connect way Auto line connect llk T Line Linetype TONE 7 Outside line number Connection Call number Name AT command Modem standard Help of AT command AT command setting Title Continued on next page Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button Enter 15 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following it
104. 5 Register the system labeled with the following procedure Add LabelSpace N 1 Select the LabelSp Rename LabelSpace A 2 To register Logical Station Number 3 To register System Label Save LabelSpace S anes Delete LabelSpace D Refresh system label data for Control amp cae num Scr 6 i es OD Hd wnt en6 Cc p MELSEC gt Act UN vfer senm Organize Newfolder Fe Favorites Name Date modified WE Desktop 1B Downloads El Recent Places A Libraries El Documents a Music El Pictures E Videos Computer 4 Filename Save as type ACT Regist File act 2 Hide Folders Registration complete O Menu gt Export 3 Page 131 Section 7 3 8 Enter the file name to be saved CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS 2 Importing LabelSpaces Import an exported file to LabelSpace of another personal computer Copy the exported files of the communication setting and the LabelSpace to the personal computer to be imported beforehand Operating procedure seid Sea 1 Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Eam Application gt MX Component gt Communication ne an ee Setup Utility Communication Setup Utility starts COM setup import p COM setup export Wizard es mu Exit Module type las71C24 Station No DEE 2 Transmission speed 15200 bee 9 Menu gt COM setup import
105. 62 CHAPTER 4 OPERATION PROCEDURES 4 3 User Application Creating Procedures 4 3 1 Whenusing Visual Basic NET The following describes the creation procedures when using Visual Basic NET Power on the personal computer and start Windows Install MX Component Version 4 re CHAPTER 3 Program setting type Select the setting type Yes Start Visual Basic NET Use labels od Add controls to Visual Basic NET Utility setting type No Start Label Utility and create and register labels Create a form and paste the controls ActProgType Set the property of the pasted controls IG CHAPTER 8 3 Section 7 3 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the communication Start Communication Setup Utility and set the communication settings by following the instructions of wizard settings by following the instructions of wizard Section 7 1 CHAPTER 8 Start Visual Basic NET Start Visual Basic NET Add controls to Visual Basic NET Add controls to Visual Basic NET Create a form and paste the controls DotUtIType Create a form and paste the controls ActUtlType Set the property logical station number Set the property logical station number of the pasted controls E CHAPTERS of the pasted controls F CHAPTER 8
106. 7 3 7 The labels referred from controls are updated Description Deletion complete 12 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS 3 Registering system labels structured data type Operating procedure LabelSpace Undefined Name Reference Workspace EA Logical Station Number F Structured Data Types 5 System Label List Register the system labeled with the following procedure 1 Select the LabelSpace 2 To register Logical Station Number 3 To register System Label Description CAP NUM SCRE 7 E MXLabelManages Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Add LabelSpace N Rename LabelSpace A Delete LabelSpace D Reference Workspace F Logical Station Number FE Structured Data Types S System Label List lol o Es If you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace Description cap NUM SCRL EA MXLabelManager Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Label Reference Workspace LB Logical Station Number Structured Data Types RE System Label List Structured Data Types S gt new Lo o Es If you want to create a system label of a structure type structure type to register in ivance Description car num crt lt 7 Continued on next page 1 2 O Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Application gt MX Component gt Label U
107. A 1 Start lamp Bit xo Delete LabelSpace D Refresh system label data for Control R Logical Station Number G gt See A For referring more than one Workspace select Export es LabelSpace from the LabelSpace window first and System Label gt operate the procedure 2 to 4 Exit Alters Description Jn the next LabelSpace there is a change in the system label database After selecting th g n G car Num scr ES MA The system label change notification icon is displayed while referring more than one Workspace 6 Menu gt Refresh system label data for Control Menu M Edit E Help H ao i peg E lt gt Page 131 Section 7 3 7 Save LabelSpace S Ctri S gt The labels referred from controls are updated Delete LabelSpace D Description Jn the next LabelSpace there is a change in the system label database After selecting th Registration complete Point FP The system label change notification icon is not displayed when the system labels are used without referring and registering the Workspace 80 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS 5 1 4 Using System Labels on another personal computer Export a LabelSpace and import it to another personal computer to use a system label 1 Exporting LabelSpaces Export a LabelSpace and create a file Operating procedure 1 YD Start gt All Pr
108. A a ee eatin Al 88 6 3 Confirming Version atinada a lew aden tn dees 88 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 89 7 1 Communication Setup Utility 0 0 enn eee ene 89 7 1 1 Operations on Target setting tab 0 cece oo 90 7 1 2 Operations on List view tab 0 cence enn e ene eae 91 7 1 3 Operations on Connection test tab 6 ect ee neces 92 7 1 4 Importing communication settings oocooocccooocccoo coc 93 7 1 5 Exporting communication settings 0 0 0 cc cence ene eee 94 7 1 6 Operations on Communication Setting Wizard screens 00000 95 7 1 7 Operations on Connect Line Screen 0 cence een eee 100 T2 PEC Monitor Utility sesser andsime Eemi Fuel es a A Tn need 107 7 2 1 Operations on Transfer setting Screen 2 cence eens 107 7 2 2 Operations on Device Batch tab 2 0 0 cence ene eae 110 7 2 3 Operations on Buffer Memory tab 2 0 0 000 ccc cence ence eee e ee 112 7 2 4 Operation on Entry Device tab 2 cece nee n nee eae 114 7 2 5 Operations on Write to Device Screen 6 ccc een eens 116 7 2 6 Operations on Time setting Screen 0 cence eens 117 7 2 7 Operations on telephone line connection disconnection screens 4 118 TI LabelUtiliY cio AA AR A tr ds 119 7 3 1 Operations on Label SCreen o o ooooooonooo ence e ene e eae 119 7 3 2 Registering deleting logical station numbers ooooooooooooononoooooo 121 1 3 3 System label lit arasen tesa bad ce ie n
109. AM Shortcut 2K8 Folders a Shortcut IS Manager Date modified 7 9 2012 4 12 PM Size 1 71 KB e Date created 7 9 2012 4 12 PM gt WebSites Default Web Site Default Web Site Home BELa m 4B Application Pools abe A El a dl Web Sites ASP NET 19 Default Web site O a z t gt A 3 NET Profile NET Roles NET Trust NET Use imt erty Mo Stop El frome Bo amp D Explore Providers Session State SMTP E mail 2 Add Application Al Add Virtual Directory om 3 gt Advanced Sting gt A q y View Vita Directos Directory Error Pages Handler MIME Types Configure Ft Bindings meena Mappings Limits Gi Refresh c X Remove PR KE Switch to Content View y E Features View Jl Content View Web Site name Default Web Site Path Alias Mxcomponent Example images Physical path CAMELSEC Act Samples VBScript SampleASP ES E Setting complete 308 Cancel 1 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Classic View gt Administrative Tools and double click IIS Manager When user account control is enabled the following screen is displayed Click the button User Account Control ttn lt ly on to continue If you started this action continue y y Details TIS Manager Microsoft Windows User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer
110. AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region O
111. Bullarsibay ZEZ 121 7 3 3 System label list Register edit and browse a system label Screen display Delete System Label Name Data Type Device 1 LABEL1 Bit 2 LABEL2 Bit 3 LABEL3 E 4 Maximum number Item Description of characters Delete Select the system label to be deleted System Label Name Enter a desired system label name For characters that cannot be used for label names refer to I Page 326 Appendix 9 32 characters Data Type Device Set a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed by clicking e Page 123 2 in this section It can also be entered directly 128 characters Set the device to be assigned to system label The bit specified word device DO 1 can be specified If the structure is set for data type Detail Setting is displayed Set the items on the Structured Data Device Setting screen displayed by clicking Detail Setting Page 125 3 in this section Page 126 4 in this section 50 characters 1 Basic operations Operating procedure a Adding system label list Select a LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window Menu gt System Label gt System Label List gt New Select a LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window right click System Label List on the Navigation window and select New b Changing system label list name Select the system label list name on the Navigation window
112. CI Call indication gt auauauussaaiaasssasasasasasesesese 1 Connection example which can turn ON OFF CD signal No 1 pin Q series compatible C24 Cable Connection and Signal Direction sal Connection example for full duplex half duplex Computer Side Signal Name Pin number communication Signal Name CD 1 CD RD RXD 2 a gt RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 a gt SG DSR DR 6 e gt DSR DR RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 lt _ gt CS CTS RI Cl 9 APPENDIX 2 Connection example which cannot turn ON OFF CD signal No 1 pin Connection example for performing DC code control or DTR DSR control Personal Q series compatible C24 Cable Connection and Signal Direction j A Computer Side Connection example for full duplex communication _ Signal Name Pin number Signal Name CD 1 CD RD RXD 2 gt RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 gg n SG DSR DR 6 a gt DSR DR RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 lt _ L CS CTS RI CI 9 salas O X pu ddy UONeEdIUNWWOD jenas JO sajdwex3 Buu 21929 ZEZ SH xipuaddy 313 Appendix 3 2 FX Series The following shows the example of wiring a personal computer and the FX extended port 1 Connection
113. CNET H O x x x x 58 ls Q Q12DCCPU V Ed x x x x x x a S Serial communication x x x x x x o CC Link O O O x x x 3 Cc 1 Cannot perform communication if a remote password is set to the connected station CPU gt 2 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 5 3 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 5 Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No IP information system Continued on next page 289 Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU 1 Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion 3 LCPU QSCPU on FXCPU Q mode 2 CPU V CPU CC IE Field 4 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 Cannot perform communication if a remote password is set to the connected station CPU 2 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not
114. CPU When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3c or FX3u FX3uc the channel setting CH1 CH2 combo box is displayed Select CH1 to confirm the setting Fx Parameter Es Memory Capacity PLC Name PLCSystem 1 PICS P The setting contents are deared when unchecked eae When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc communication the D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 deared and must be unchecked T 5 Print Window Print Window Preview Default Chek End Cancel SWO UONeEdIUNWWOD JO siel9q ZZZ WJO4 uogosuuog YIBY JO asn 104 UONEANBIUO Wajs s zz 41 7 RS 232 cable and function expansion board special adaptor for FXCPU Serial port shape of Series Function expansion board and special adapter RS 232 cable personal computer FX3u 232 BD FXau FX3uc FX 232CAB 1 Function expansion board FX3u BD 1 FXsu 232ADP FX36 232 BD FX36 FX 232CAB 1 FX3c CNV ADP FX3u 232ADP FXon 232ADP FX2n CNV BD F2 232CAB 1 F FXon FXe2n 232 BD 9 pin D sub FX 232CAB 1 FXeanc 232ADP FX2n CNV BD FXon 232ADP F2 232CAB 1 FXinc FX2nc FX2nc 232ADP FX 232CAB 1 FXon 232ADP FX1n CNV BD F2 232CAB 1 FXis FXin FXin 232 BD FX 232CAB 1 FXe2nc 232ADP FXin CNV BD FXsu 232 BD FXsu FX3uc 7 FX 232CAB 2 Function expansion board FXsu BD 1 FX3u
115. Collect device data using this logical station number 151 ainpasoid ssad9y Z 8 sajnpoy a9er1aju jauJayy3 Buisn usu uoyeoarunwwog Jeulayla 28 8 3 Ethernet Communication When Using Built in Ethernet Port CPUs This section provides the procedure for the Ethernet communication with the built in Ethernet port CPU and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 3 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using Ethernet communication Connect the built in lt Connecting by specified host IP address gt Ethernet port CPU and lt Connecting to the Ethernet port directly gt personal computer Y Set parameters of the built ES re ig F in Ethernet port CPU E Page 153 2 in this section Y Edit the HOSTS file Y Start Communication Setup Utility and set the IP address on Communication Setting Wizard y Start Communication Setup Utility and set the settings of the direct connection on Communication Setting Wizard E Page 154 4 in this section Step 3 4 On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Complete ES Page 154 4 in this section Step 5 6 1 The HOSTS file is not required to be edited when entering the IP address in the host name IP address of Communication Setup Utility and the ActHostAddress property of the E
116. Component Control system a EN E 1 aea Tracking cable e Connection to control system Connection to control system via standby system ED MX Component Control system ji Standby system al 169 113 Me eaea Tracking cable Ndo juepunpay YM Ajiquedwog 1 xipueddy 319 b Connection to MELSECNET H Ethernet or CC Link IE Controller Network Access to the control system after system switching is continued as shown below depending on communication error occurrence The following shows an example of Ethernet connection lt When communication is normal gt im Connection to control system MX Component Ethernet Control system Standby system Tracking cable gt f Connection to control system MX Component ll i Connection to control system via standby system Control system Standby system Tracking cable lt When communication error occurs gt m L Connection to control system MX Component ll Communication error
117. Computer JAdjust memory quotas for a process LOCAL SERVICE NE allow logon through Terminal Serv Administrators Rem Administrators GB User Rights Assignment 59 e E Security Options di E Publi Key Policies 4 Y Software Restriction Policies amp IP Security Policies on Local C 2 Select Local Policies gt User Rights Assignment in the tree structure and double click Debug real Eucpa a programs Create global objects Administrators INTE Create permanent shared objects JDeny access to this computer Fro Deny logon as a batch job Deny logon as a service Deny logon locally SUPPORT _388945a Deny logon through Terminal Serv Enable computer and user accoun Force shutdown from a remote sy Administrators SUPPORT _388945a Ei Generate security audits LOCAL SERVICE NE s j 5 ff Impersonate a client after authen Administrators SER aa PK 3 Clickthe AddUserorGroup button Local Security Setting Explain This Setting E Debug programs unope ssas9e jauJaju ay Bumnes yz xipuaddy JUSWUOJIAUZ jaue 1 u j9uJe u BunByUoD 0 MOH Z xIpuaddy Continued on next page 303 304 Continued from previous V Select Users or Groups Select this object type page 4 Users or Builtin security principals Object Types Erom this location MXPC Locations Enter the object
118. DF file format Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase Order a manual by quoting the manual number model code listed in the table above 11 CONTENTS SAREIMSRPREGCAUMION SA A A A Or Aen ne T oe aes 1 CONDIMONSIO RUS ElEO Real Ep Ex DW Cesare rae seen E E 2 OPERATINGIGONSIDERATIONS A A O ere genre O 3 INTRODUCTION Ea cape es coe nee em eee a aA era A carey Peary oe 11 RELATE DIMAN WALES i222 wee O O ne ee 11 HOWsTOIREADAREISIMAINWA Leyes egeee rr sre cca ore ern eae A E N 17 TEER S Seger oe eke gcse ra ee Sos eRe me Ce oa Pan a o RSE vw Pty eda ev Amare evans ae 19 DERINIMONS FAIRER a S E rere rece cre are O A cae ae a E re 22 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 23 1 1 Overview of MX Component 23 12 OAS ir a conte tela a veges teasnades 23 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 29 2 1 System Configuration List 0 0 eee tet e eens 29 2 1 1 When using Windows XP Professional Operating System 0 00 0005 29 2 1 2 When using Windows XP Home Edition Operating System 0 0 0 eee 30 2 1 3 When using Windows Vista Operating System 2000 00 00 ccc eee eee 31 2 1 4 When using Windows 7 Operating System 0 0 0000 e cece cece cece e ees 32 2 2 System Configuration for Use of Each Connection Form 0 00000 ee ee eee 33 22 4 System configuirations ii A Redes Helens Dew da 33 2 2 2 Details of communication forms 2 0 0 0 eee 35 2 3 O
119. E PC side I F CCIE Control board Board No 1st module Continued on next page 196 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page 4 Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Host station Cancel Finish 5 Enter a comment and click the button The Communication wizard has finished collecting in A Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment CC E Control Sample Cancel lt Back lt 7 Registration complete ainpssoid ssaddy Z1 8 UOHEIIUNWWOD YIOMJON J9 OJJUOD Jl AUN DO ZL 197 4 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the CC Link IE Controller Network communication settings using the logical station number set in 3 in this section Operating procedure Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 12 CC Control Sample y Wizard Delete PC UF CC E Control Board No No 1 Ext EN Arm Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 12 CC E Control_Sample z Test Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication 2 ms Click Communication test complete 198 2 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab
120. Extended file register ER R x x x x x x Link input JAX O O O x x x Link output JAY O O O x x x Link relay J B O O O x x x Direct link Link special relay JASB O O x x x Link register J W O O O x x x Link special register J SW O O O x x x Special direct buffer memory U G o O O x x x 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 3 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU SOOIABP SAISSIIOY L OL OL UOHESIUNWWOD AJOMJON PI 31 AUN 99 104 OL OL 267 10 10 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for CC Link IE Field Network communication 1 Configuration CC Link IE Field Network T Connected Connected Relayed station CPU module module Relayed network Personal computer Relayed station Relayed CPU module 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs and own board CC Link IE Field Network board are all accessible Whether the rel
121. F UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page 5 Set the following items and click the Next gt sume Penn button CPU type Q005 CC Link module No 0 Station type Host station CPU type Q00J CC Link module No 0 cu ema re 6 Enter a comment and click the Finish button The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment CC Link G4_Sample Cancel lt Back Registration complete einpssoid SSSIDY Z 8 8 UOEOJUNWuIO yO AUN ID 8 8 181 6 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the CC Link G4 communication settings using the logical station number set in 5 in this section Operating procedure Th Communication Setup Utility a Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 8 CC Link G4_Sample Y Delete UNES IM a a Serial EE A Ra aaa PC UF comas CPU type aos Time out 10000 ms Module type eso Transmission speed 19200 bps Control DTR or RTS CC Link module No 0 Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 8 CC Link G4_Sample p La g Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count T Result CPU name Mean time of communication Click lt 7 Communic
122. How can I decide which device f A 2 trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Always Don t Install CORPORATION 8 Update Driver Software MITSUBISHI E Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver Complete 340 7 8 9 Specify EasysocketlUSBdrivers and click the Nes button The left screen is an example when C MELSEC Easysocket USBDrivers is set If more than one MELSOFT product is installed browse for the installation destination of the first product Click the install button Click the _ close button APPENDIX 2 Procedure for updating the USB driver for GOT connection a Checking method Restart the GOT while the personal computer is connected to the GOT with USB and start the Windows Device Manager If MITSUBISHI GOT1000 USB Controller is not displayed under Universal Serial Bus controllers but Unknown device is displayed under Other devices the device is required to be updated The Unknown device whose Hardware Ids is USBIWVID_06D38PID_01E0 on the lt lt Details gt gt tab of the properties screen is the update target s File Action View Help es O Bo lr General Driver Details F Unknown de 1 3 MPC b da JE Computer ca Disk drives Property JE Display adapters Hardware Ids X 2 DVD CD ROM d
123. LITY OPERATIONS 7 3 7 Updating system label data Update the system label data Operating procedure O Menu gt Refresh system label data for Control 7 3 8 Exporting LabelSpace Save the information used in Label Utility Operating procedure O Menu gt Export Screen display go ii Computer OS C MELSEC Act Uti 2 Search uti aca oi Ee 7 p Date modified Type Size e Favorites Li HE Desktop Dactact 6 12 2012 4 00PM ACT File 3K8 IB Downloads T Recent Places Save as type ACT Regist File act y Hide Folders Cancel Agn leqe7 el ejep jeqe wayshs Bunepdn Z 131 7 3 9 Importing LabelSpace Import the saved information saved in a file by exporting LabelSpace Page 131 Section 7 3 8 to Label Utility Operating procedure O Menu gt Import Screen display Organize w New folder Ke Favorites hme Tja HE Desktop ACT ac 6 12 2012400PM_ ACT File 1B Downloads T Recent Places 3 Libraries E Documents a Music EE Pictures BB Videos 132 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE This chapter explains the setting procedure and setting example of each communication path when the utility setting type is used for programming 8 1 Serial Communication This section provides the serial communication procedure and its set
124. Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No lt IP information system Continued on next page CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion 4 LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Field 4 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x FXCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 4 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 281 seBue aiqisseo0y Z 91 0L uonesiunwiwod jua Jedsue4 109 104 91 0L 2 Personal computer side port USB GOT1000 side port USB CPU side port Direct connection a Configuration Connected Rela
125. Link communication only via the serial USB connection of QCPU or via Q series compatible C24 Supported CPUs and module in CC Link communication to FXCPU are as follows CC Link module Compatible CPU Station number FX3u 64CCL FX3G FX3u FX3uc 1 to 63 170 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Checking the CC Link board Check whether the personal computer is connected properly to CC Link Operating procedure 1 Start gt All Programs gt MELSEC gt MELSEC CC Link Ver 2 Utility EE cot vera iy a 2 Click the lt lt Parameter settings gt gt tab and set the Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test Use board setting Check all the Channel No that you use following items IV Channel No 81 FF Channel No 82 I Channel No 83 T Channel No 84 Channel No Channel No 81 v Operational settings Sta No Type 1 Local station I pernied ato ange El Other settings oor EA I opeis Grana oa Channel No Channel No 81 Mode Remotenet VerImode x inputfor Er Sta Hold Clear Check Sta No 4 p Station information settings 7 ai E y Type Local station No Sta No Station type Expanded cyclic Occupied Sta Transmission rate 10Mbps Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 gt Occupied Sta Occ
126. MPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page me ES m 5 D Diagnostics gt Board Diagnostics IEE tama suse sem Check that the loop is normal ssi Link Retresh ms Goats No arme No Peres No Stin No Tanenieson Status Latest Enar Cede Maximam Minimum r Gere Model Name RSIEOIPIGFIET ai meae DoDaNo bar El E TE Bus I F Test was normaly completed sree _ snteeee lt 7 Check complete 6 Click the ose button to exit from the utility 3 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button 2 Enter 13 in Logical station number and click the This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT Next gt button You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number ainpssoid SSIDIY 8 UOHEIUNWWOD YMN PI 31 AUIT OD l 8 Logical station number 13 y MESA 3 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the PC side VF button PC side UF CC E Field board X Communication setting Eolo M
127. MX Component Version 4 MITSUBISHI Mm MELSOFT WwW Oe Maintenance MELSOFT Integrated FA Software SW4DNC ACT E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the User s Manual for the CPU module In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION AN WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under AN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Instructions NWARNING When data change program change or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates safely Furthermore for the online operations performed
128. Memory address Enter the address of the buffer memory to be monitored in hexadecimal or decimal Estes button Start stop monitor _Stop montor button Set the monitor format Item Description Monitor format Bit amp Word Set the monitor screen to the bit and word display Bit Set the monitor screen to the bit display only Word Set the monitor screen to the word display only Set the display format of the device values to be displayed when the monitor format is Bit amp Word or Word Item Description 16bit integer Set to the 16 bit integer display Display 32bit integer Set to the 32 bit integer display Real number single precision Set to the real number single precision display Real number double precision Set to the real number double precision display ASCII character Set to the ASCII character string display Set the radix when the display is 16 bit integer or 32 bit integer Item Description Data format DEC Set to the decimal display HEX Set to the hexadecimal display Continued on next page 112 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS Item Description Bit order Set the order of the bit devices being monitored Item Description F 0 Display in order of F E 1 O from left to right 0 F Display in order of 0 1 E F from left to right 1 Monitor screen Display the buffer memory status For the bit device status 1 indicates
129. Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 3 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 244 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 3 4 Accessible ranges when using CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module This section indicates the accessible ranges for Ethernet communication using the CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module 1 Configuration Connected CC Link IE Field Relayed station CPU Network module module Relayed network CC Link IE Field Network Relayed station Relayed EA Ethernet adapter module CPU module Personal computer EM 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network Pi ne a ESSE Q ee FXCPU ce o fo fof x MELSECNET H O O x x x x OEE EEN Ethernet O x x x x x S Serial communication O x O x x x AY CC Link O O O x x x m CC IE Field 2 O x O x x x 5 MELSECNET H x x x x x x Q LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x 3 Serial communication O x O x x x 5 CC Link O O O x x x 3 1
130. O x x Present value TN O x O x ot Retentive Contact TS O x O x z timer Coil TC O x O x x ST Present value TN O x O x x Link special relay SB O x O x x Link special register SW O x O x x Step relay S x x x x ot Direct input DX x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x 1 Accessible to only FXoNCPU FX1sCPU FX1n c CPU FX2n c CPU FX3GCPU FX3u c CPU when using the FX extended port Continued on next page CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Z O x O x 01 2 Index register V x x x x O12 R OF x O x o File register ZR 03 x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output J Y O O O x x Link relay J B O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G ow O O O x 1 Accessible to only FXoNCPU FX1sCPU FX1n c CPU FX2n c CPU FX3GCPU FX3u c CPU when using the FX extended port 2 WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only 3 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 4 When accessing FX series CPU other than FX3GCPU and FX3u c CPU specify the data regi
131. ORD LWORD ARRAY REAL LREAL TIME STRING TIMER COUNTER RETENTIVETIMER POINTER Bit Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit Double Word Unsigned Bit String 32 bit Word Signed Double Word Signed FLOAT Single Precision FLOAT Double Precision String Time Timer Counter Retentive Timer Pointer Data type hierarchy ANY ANY_NUM ANY_BIT ANY_REAL ANY_INT ANY_DATE ANY_SIMPLE ANY16 ANY32 Device name X Y D M T B C F L P V Z W I N U J K H E A SD SM SW SB FX FY DX DY FD TR BL SG VD ZR ZZ Character string recognized as device XO or the like Device name numeral NOT MOD ST operator LD LDN ST STN S S1 R R1 AND ANDN OR ORN XOR XORN ADD SUB MUL DIV GT GE EQ NE LE LT JMP JMPC JMPCN CAL CALC CALCN RET RETC RETCN IL operator LDI LDP LDF ANI ANDP ANDF ANB ORI ORP ORF ORB MPS MRD MPP INV MEP MEF EGP EGF OUT H SET RST PLS PLF FF DELTA P SFT P MC MCR STOP PAGE NOP NOPLF SFC instruction ST code body SFCP SFCPEND BLOCK BEND TRANL TRANO TRANA TRANC TRANCA TRANOA SEND TRANOC TRANOCA TRANCO TRANCOC STEPN STEPD STEPSC STEPSE STEPST STEPR STEPC STEPG STEPI STEPID STEPISC STEPISE STEPIST STEPIR TRANJ TRANOJ TRANOCJ TRANCJ TRANCOJ TRANCOCJ RETURN IF THEN ELSE ELSIF END_IF CASE OF END_CASE FOR TO BY DO END_FOR WHILE END_WHILE REPEAT
132. OSTS file is not required to be edited when entering the IP address in the host name IP Address of Communication Setup Utility and the ActHostAddress property of the Ethernet communication control 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Personal computer Logical station number of 2 is used Network No 1 re Station number 2 ell Q series compatible E71 192 168 0 2 Station number 2 Q 0 CPU1 2 Q02HCPU M Q series compatible E71 192 168 0 1 Station number 1 CPU2 J TWH Q02HCPU a Network No 2 Q series compatible E71 192 168 0 3 Station number 3 146 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting parameter setting Set the network type start I O number network number station number mode and operational settings on the Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration screen of GX Works2 CPU to be set Setting screen example Ethernet parameters Pere ale 2 Reb Tne Eran freer Start I O No 0000 0020 Network No 1 Total Stations a gt g Staten E 7 Mode Onine Onine _ Operation Setting _ Operation Seting Initial Setting Initial Setting Open Setting Open Setting Router Relay Parameter Router Rel
133. PERATING CONSIDERATIONS This section explains the considerations in the following order Consideration of operating system and personal computer to be used 2 Consideration of installation and uninstallation 3 Programmable controller CPU related considerations 4 Considerations for using of other MELSOFT products 5 Considerations for using of Ethernet modules 6 Considerations for using of CC Link modules 7 Considerations for using of serial communication modules 8 Consideration of modem communication 9 Consideration of programming 10 Considerations for using of Microsoft Excel 11 Considerations for using of Microsoft Access 12 Considerations for using of VBScript Considerations of operating system and personal computer to be used 1 Restrictions applied when a user without Administrator s authority operates MX Component Note that the following restrictions are applied when a user without Administrator s authority operates MX Component a Communication Setup Utility The logical station number cannot be created changed or deleted e Communication settings cannot be imported e This utility cannot be started up if the communication settings are set using MX Component earlier than Version 3 004 b PLC Monitor Utility e This utility cannot be started up if the communication settings are set using MX Component earlier than Version 3 004 e Device registration cannot be performed on
134. Q Contact TS Oe Timer g El Coil TC ee T ox Present value TN O 2 Contact TS 2 3 Counter a Z Coil TC 2 C 2 5 Retentive Contact TS timer Coil TC ST Present value TN Link special relay SB Link special register SW Step relay S Direct input DX Direct output DY Accumulator A X X X X X XI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XI x x px x x OJO O JOJO JOJO OJO O O OJOJO O OJO O O O OJOO O xIx x x x xIx x x x x x x x x xlO0 x x x xOlOlOlO lOo x x x x x x x O O O O O OJO O O OJOJO JO O OJOJOJO O O JOJOJOJO O x x Continued on next page 257 258 Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Z O x O x x Index register V x x x x x R o x O x x File register ZR O x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output JAY O O O x x Link relay JAB O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W Q O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G O O O O x 1 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to
135. QOOUCPU Q01CPU Q01UCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q02PHCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU QOIUDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDEHCPU QCPU Q mode QO6HCPU QO6PHCPU QO6UDHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q12HCPU Q12PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q25HCPU Q25PHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU LCPU LO2CPU L26CPU BT C controller CPU Q12DCCPU V 1 QSCPU QS001CPU i Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DSCPU Q motion CPU Q173DSCPU FXCPU FXoCPU FXosCPU FXonCPU FX1CPU FXinCPU FXincCPU FX sCPU FXuCPU FX2cCPU FX2nCPU FXzncCPU FXs3GCPU FX3uCPU FX3ucCPU 1 The first five digits of the serial number is 12042 or higher are supported sndo 4 9 10 1Ju09 jqewweboId aejqeoddy yz 51 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION This chapter explains the installation and uninstallation procedure of MX Component 3 1 Installation The following explains the installation procedure Screens from Windows 7 are used except for different operations required in other operating systems Point O Before installing MX Component close the other applications running on Windows O The installer may not work normally because of the operating system s or other companies update programs Windows Update the Java update program or the like start automatically Install MX Component after configuring those update programs not to start automatically When installi
136. QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control 2 3 x 2 x CC IE Field 2 O e E MELSECNET H O O x x O x 1 QCPU Q mode Ethernet On x x A O Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x CC IE Control 2 3 x x x CC IE Field 2 2 e MELSECNET H O O x x x x Q12DCCPU V Ethernet x x x X x x Serial communication x x O x x Xx CC Link O O O x x x bi ll 2 3 4 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No IP information system CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 5 Personal computer side port Serial GOT1000 side port Serial CPU side port Q series compatible C24 or L series compatible C24 a Configuration Connected Connected Relayed station CPU module module GOT Relayed network Serial gt Relay
137. SUPPLY INC USB cable U2C M30BK ELECOM Co Ltd USB A type USB miniB type 1 MR J3USBCBL3M Mitsubishi Electric Corporation GT09 C30USB 5P Mitsubishi Electric System amp Service Co Ltd 1 Universal model QCPU LCPU only O Applicable modules Refer to Access Target of the accessible device table in the following section 5 Page 250 Section 10 5 1 Accessible devices Point Using a USB cable for the first time Install the USB driver For the installation of the USB driver refer to the following appendix 5 Page 328 Appendix 10 USB Driver Installation O Considerations and restrictions For the considerations and restrictions when accessing a programmable controller CPU refer to the following section Page 3 OPERATING CONSIDERATIONS 5 MELSECNET H communication xP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O x O Considerations 1 Use the communication driver SWODNC MNETH or later The other communication drivers cannot be used 2 For details of the supported operating system of the network board to be used for communication refer to the manual of each network board 6 CC Link IE Controller Network communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O x O Considerations 1 Use the communication driver SW1DNC MNETG B or later The other communication drivers cannot be used 2 For details of the supported operating system of the network board to be used for com
138. Section 7 1 5 to the utility This screen is used when the communication settings set on another personal computer are to be applied to the personal computer being used Operating procedure O Menu gt COM setup import Screen display CO ii Computer OS C MELSEC Act Uti s Search ut p Organize New folder sr 00 PEA Name File name 4 ACT Regist File act al Open v Cancel Point To import the communication settings use MX Component of a version of the one used for export or later Using a MX Component version earlier than that may cause incorrect import AIN dnjes uopeojunwwoo pZ sBunjes uoneoiunuiwoo Bunsodwy 12 93 7 1 5 Exporting communication settings Save the communication settings set on the personal computer in a file The file where data are saved is called the ACT registered file This screen is used to apply the communication settings on another personal computer Point Uninstalling deletes all the settings within Communication Setup Utility To avoid this export the file storing the settings Operating procedure O Menu gt COM setup export Screen display Corts Computer OS C MELSEC Act Ut Organize New folder sE 0 A Favorites Neve EE Desktop LJ ACTact I Downloads Wl Recent Places Save as type ACT Regist File act y 2 Hide Folders Cancel
139. Select the check box Ethernet port direct connection Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Host station CPU type QO4UDEH Multiple CPU None 8 Enter a comment and click the button 155 eunpesoid SSSIDY 8 SNdO Hod U19443 uy img Bus USyAn UOeEo UNWUWOD Jausa 8 Perform the built in Ethernet port CPU search on the following screen displayed by clicking the Find CPU Buitin Ethernet port on network button when use it Choosing the target CPU from the list and clicking the a ET commer j button enables to update the IP address on the 10 971 9177 QO4UDEHCPU on Cancel Communication Setting Wizard PLC side setting Built in Ethernet port CPUs on the same network is the target of the search X a Finds CPU Built in Ethernet port on the same network This cannot be performed when the following happens Response waiting time sec No response within response wafting time Connected via a router or subnet mask is different Pa Update Do not respond to search for CPU Built in Ethernet port is checked in PLC parameter 156 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 5 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the Ethernet communication settings using the logical station number set in 4 in this section Operating procedure ane ei
140. Space name 122 Logical Station Number on NE Structured Data Types Di E System Label List o J Q Description lt hh the next LabelSpace there is a change in the system label database After selecting th an E rc i o Oo n E T 2 CaP NUM SCRL YT U amp lt System label notification icon 4 z 3 Right click the system label notification icon and Change Contents of System Label Database E h select Change Contents of System Label Database Page 130 Section 7 3 6 4 Click the button juauodulo XN 01 ZSAJOM XH ul paBueyo shumes soinep Bui iddy Ep s eo Change notification is received Do you want to reflect the changes loe Jim Continued on next page 79 Continued from previous page Select the system label list name to display the system Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Del SystemLabelName Data Type Device Labell 1 Start_lamp Bit xo label list Reference WorkspaceWS001 E Logical Station Number RE Structured Data Types B f System Label List EJ Description In the next LabelSpace there is a change in the system label database After selecting th 5 Menu gt Save LabelSpace lt Page 119 Section 7 3 1 gt The system label is registered Menu M Edit E Help H Add LabelSpace N Del System Label Name 2 Data Type Device Rename LabelSpace
141. TER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES This chapter describes the accessible devices and accessible ranges in each communication form 10 1 Considerations for Accessing Devices For accessible devices the devices not described or devices marked with Xx inaccessible in the accessible device list indicated in Section 10 2 and later are not supported by MX Component Do not specify the inaccessible devices seoineg Buisseooy JO SuoNesepisuoD pOL 235 1 0 2 For Serial Communication 1 0 2 1 Accessible devices 236 This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for serial communication The following table indicates the accessible devices for serial communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Function input FX O x x x Function output FY O x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O x x Special register SD O O O x x Input relay X O O O x o Output relay Y O O O x o l Internal relay M O O O x o Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O x x Edge relay V O x O x x Link relay B O x O x x Data register D O O O x oO Link register W O x O x x Contact TS O x O x ot a Coil TC O x O x x Present value TN O x O x o l Contact TS O x O x ou ar Coil TC O x
142. U Q mode Enter a comment and click the button 187 ainpesoid ssad9y 01 8 UOEO UNWLOS ZIO eINWIS XD 018 188 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the GX Simulator2 communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 10 GX Simulator2_Sample g Co Menu Help ly Wizard _ Delete PC UF GX Simulator2 Target Simulator Simulator A CPU Series QCPU Q mode Exit Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count Result CPU name Mean time of communication 10 GX Simulator2_Sample p La al 2 7 Communication test complete 1 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 10 Check the logical station number settings 2 Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 10 Click the Test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to
143. U with USB cable Z Device Manager lees 2 Start the Device Manager right click MITSUBISHI File Action View Help el 8lepead 7 SATA L Easysocket Driver and select Uninstall gt Other devices E Portable Devices B Processors 4 Sound video and game controllers Ml System devices a Universal Serial Bus controllers Intel R ICH10 Family USB Enhanced Host Controller 3A3A Intel R ICH10 Family USB Enhanced Host Controller 3A3C Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3A34 Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 335 Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3A36 6 Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3A37 Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3A38 Intel R ICH10 Family USB Universal Host Controller 3A39 ij MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver USB Composite Device Update Driver Software USB Mass Storage Device Disable 3 USB Root Hub Uninstall USB Root Hub N USB Root Hub Scan for hardware changes USB Root Hub A USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub Y USB Root Hub Uninstalls the driver for the selected device Vv Continued on next page 337 Jeauq gsn Bunepdn xipueddy 338 Continued from previous page MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver Waming You are about to uninstall this device from your system Delete the driver software for this device Cok
144. UNTIL END_REPEAT EXIT TYPE END_TYPE STRUCT END_STRUCT RETAIN VAR_ACCESS END_VAR FUNCTION END_FUNCTION FUCTION_BLOCK END_FUCTION_BLOCK STEP INITIAL_STEP END_STEP TRANSITION END_TRANSITION FROM UNTILWHILE Function name in application function Function names in application functions AND_E NOT_E or the like Function block name in application function Function block names in application functions CTD CTU or the like Symbol L 425 gt 5 57 8 tab character 1 Date and time literal Others DATE DATE_AND_TIME DT TIME TIME_OF_DAY TOD ACTION END_ACTION CONFIGURATION END_CONFIGURATION CONSTANT F_EDGE R_EDGE AT PROGRAM WITH END_PROGRAM TRUE FALSE READ_ONLY READ_WRITE RESOURCE END_RESOURCE ON TASK EN ENO BODY_CCE BODY_FBD BODY_IL BODY_LD BODY_SFC BODY_ST END_BODY END_PARAMETER_SECTION PARAM_FILE_PATH PARAMETER_SECTION SINGLE RETAIN INTERVAL 326 APPENDIX Category Character string String that starts with K1 to K8 K1AAA or the like Statement in ladder language FB BLK START FB START FB END FB BLK END FB IN FB OUT FB_NAME INSTANCE_NAME FB INSTANCE Common instruction MOV or the like Windows reserved word COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 COMY LPT1 LPT2 LPT3 LPT4 LPT5 LPT6 LPT7 LPT8 LPT9 AUX CON PRN NUL 2 Considerations on using
145. Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing STOP Installation Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP installation O Completed the installation of this product nd Installation complete CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 9 When installing a MELSOFT product the message on the left may be displayed Click the button to continue the installation When using Windows XP click the msama button The screen display may be different partially depending on the used operating system This does not affect the operation We have checked the operation and
146. Wizard 6 Comment the logical station number A z E 2 Starting procedure F Operating procedure e Menu gt Wizard e Clickthe savetex button on the utility screen susaJos pez Bunes vonesiunuuos uo suonejado 9 95 96 3 Explanation of Communication Setting Wizard screens Communication Setting Wizard screens are shown from wizard 1 to wizard 6 in order The following explains Communication Setting Wizard screens in displayed order Point O The displays or available setting items of Communication Setting Wizard screens differ depending on the communication settings Set all available setting items being displayed Some of Communication Setting Wizard screens may not be displayed depending on the settings Operating procedure Start Communication Setting Wizard a Wizard 1 1 Enter or select the logical station number and click the button Ci Renae e The logical station number can be registered from 0 to You can press Back at any time to change your 1023 selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number 1 ba Continued on next page Continued from previous page Wizard 2 Please select the PC side VF PC side UF Serial Communication setting Connect port COM1 Y 10000 ms Time out lt 7 Wizard 3 Please select the PLC side VF PLC
147. X Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF PROGRAM SETTING TYPE CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF PROGRAM SETTING TYPE To perform communication using the program setting type the properties of the corresponding ACT controls is required to be set For the properties of the corresponding ACT controls directly enter them on the property window or change their settings in the user program For details of the properties which must be set for the corresponding ACT controls refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual For the use if MX Component refer to the following sections Item Reference Serial communication Page 133 Section 8 1 Ethernet communication when using Ethernet interface modules Page 146 Section 8 2 CC Link G4 communication Page 175 Section 8 8 Modem communication Page 208 Section 8 15 On MX Component the following property setting method is available for those who are not familiar with property setting eiii P ae 1 Specify the communication path where the property settings are to be set using the Communication Setting Wizard on Communication Setup Utility For details
148. Y FX 422CABO 1 5m FX 232AWC H Point O Transmission speed When connecting to FX3c FXsu FX3uc using FX 232AWC H select any of 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps or 115 2kbps for the transmission speed When connecting using FX 232AWC or FX 232AW select either 9 6kbps or 19 2kbps for the transmission speed O Connecting to FXCPU Be sure to use equipment shown in the table when connecting to FXCPU 38 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS Considerations on using RS 422 interface cables converters For the specifications of an RS 422 interface conversion cable converter and the considerations on using them read the following instructions as well as the manuals of each product for correct handling e Connecting disconnecting the conversion cable converter When connecting disconnecting a peripheral device conversion cable or converter to from the RS 422 interface be sure to touch a grounding strap or grounded metal to discharge static electricity stored in the cable or in your body before the operation regardless of whether electricity is being supplied or not After doing this follow the procedure below Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF before connecting disconnecting a conversion cable converter that receives 5VDC power supply from the RS 422 interface Operating procedure 1 Turn OFF the personal computer 2 Turn OFF the conversion cable converter Ground the FG terminal if provided 3 Connect d
149. a ca bu tton E FXOptionDrivers Monitoring ProductDataBase E E ProductDataBase2 ProjectDataBase ProjectDataBase2 SharedMemory ae USEDrivers A Utility Select the folder that contains drivers for your hardware To view any subfolders click a plus sign above fipund New Hardware Wiad 6 Select MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver and click Please select the best match for your hardware from the list below Sl the button 2 MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver Description Version Manufacturer MITSUBISHI Ee et Driver 0 0 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CO c wi et Driver 2 0 0 0 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CO cow This driver is not digitally signed Tell me why driver signing is important lt Back J _nex gt Cancel Hardware Installation 7 Click the button The software you are installing for this hardware MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation uopejjesu J9AU GSN OL xIPUaddy Found New Hardware Wizard The screen shown on the left is displayed and the USB Comp
150. ails User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer lt 7 Setting complete CHAPTER 6 STARTING AND EXITING UTILITIES 3 Setting to always execute programs as an administrator Set the following setting to Run as administrator at all times The procedure is also applied to PLC Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 Select Communication Setup Utility right click E Windows Fax and Scan Windows Media Center Windows Media Player dE Windows Update lt A XPS Viewer and select Properties Run as administrator DB Accessories p Games Troubleshoot compatibility Open file location I Maintenance Pin to Taskbar J meLsec Pin to Start Menu I MELSOFT Application Gx Developer Restore previous versions To MELFANSweb Homepat Se z DB GT Works3 I GX Works2 Cut I MELSOFT iQ Works Copy D MT Works2 Delete I MX Component a IS Communication Setup Rename Label Utility E R PLC Monitor utility y N Ji PX Developer di RT ToolBox2 Help and Support 4 Back Windows Security s 2 MECA 2 Select the lt lt Compatibility gt gt tab and select Run this program as an administrator Securty Details General Shotcut Compatibity If you have problems with this program and it worked correctly on an earlier version of Windows select the compatibilty mode that ma
151. aiqisseo0y Z 91 0L uoneoiunwWod JuaJedsuel 105 104 9L 0L 15 Personal computer side port Ethernet board GOT1000 side port Ethernet port CPU side port Bus connection a Configuration Connected Relayed a Bus station CPU module Ethernet Relayed network z SI A i Relayed station Relayed i CPU module CER Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion Q mode CPU V LCPU QSCPU CPU FXCPU CC IE Control O 07 0 7 E y CC IE Field A MELSECNET H O x x x x QCPU Q mode i Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x GG iE Field S e a MELSECNET H O O x x x x eee Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 296 APPENDIX APPENDIX Ap
152. al computer connected to Ethernet The routing parameter settings are not necessary for the request source The routing parameter settings are necessary for relay stations so that they can access the request source For settings refer to the following manual LA Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application sjajoweJeg Bunnoy jo daguo xipuaddy 299 Appendix 2 How to Configure Internet Intranet Environment This section describes an example of configuring a system that uses MX Component to create a home page HTML ASP for communication with the programmable controller CPU and display it using the browser Internet Explorer via the Internet intranet Appendix 2 1 Operating procedure The following is the procedure to configure the Internet intranet environment y Start Prepare the personal computer Danes gt Page 301 Appendix 2 2 Install the Web server RERET Page 302 Appendix 2 3 y Set the Internet access account brabus I Page 303 Appendix 2 4 Y Restart the personal computer Set the settings to release Web pages Pine lt gt Page 307 Appendix 2 5 Conduct a test using the sample page Abnormal baleen gia Page 311 Appendix 2 6 Set the settings to release any Web E page a eee L Page 307 Appendix 2 5 Point Web pag
153. als of Ethernet module and setting software Continued on next page 240 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Access Target Device Device Name QCPU a A Q12DCCPU V LCPU ascPu FXCPU 2 Q mode Z O x O x O Index register V x x x x O R o3 x O x O File register ZR Oe x O x x Extended file register ER R x x x x x Link input J X O O O x x Link output J Y O O O x x Link relay J B O O O x x Direct link Link special relay J SB O O O x x Link register J W O O O x x Link special register J SW O O O x x Special direct buffer memory U G oO O O O O 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 For the supported FXCPU and devices refer to the manuals of Ethernet module and setting software 3 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 4 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section 5 Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU SOOINSP A AISSSIIY EOL uolediunWWOD 2u194 3 JOY OL 241 10 3 2 Accessible ranges when using Ethernet interface modules This section indicates the accessible ranges for Ethernet communication using the Ethernet inte
154. ames and user names of phone numbers numbers Display cursor position Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered phone numbers Operating procedure 1 Selecta group for which the phone number to be registered on the list of registered phone numbers 2 Click the rewcinmos button gt The Call number setting screen is displayed Group name AFactory Destination name Construction Call number ee A Outside lime number 0 gt For only line connection Password Eag Apassword input is necessary when the password is unset or when connecting to a line Comment ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Cancel 102 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Group name Display the group name to which the information is registered Enter the name of the phone number to be set Destination name The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50 Call number Enter the phone number The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50 Outside line number Set the outside line number The maximum number of characters that can be set is 10 For only line When a password is set for Q series compatible C24 this setting enables to process the connection password authorization automatically to connect the line Enter notes on the registered information The maximum number of characters that can be
155. ameters CPU to be set Setting screen example CPU 1 CPU 2 Performing communications check After completion of preparations for Ethernet communication execute ping in the MS DOS mode to check connection before starting communications on MX Component When normal C gt ping 192 168 0 2 Reply from 192 168 0 2 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 When abnormal C gt ping 192 168 0 2 Request timed out If ping does not pass through check cable and module connections and Windows side IP address and other settings CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 5 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 2 This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number 2 y cme su r 3 PC side VF Ethernet board Communication setting Connect module QJ71E71 bd Protocol TCP y 4 Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF Ethernet module Communication setting Module type QU71E71 y Host IP Address 192 168 0 1 Network No 1 Continued on next page Start Communication Set
156. ammable controller CPU related considerations 1 Considerations for performing USB communication ON OFF of a programmable controller CPU during communications with the programmable controller CPU may cause a communication error which cannot be recovered If it is not recovered completely disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it after 5 or more seconds If this error occurs at the initial communication after the above operation the function will be performed properly in and after the second communications 2 Time data of programmable controller CPU a b c d For QCPU Q mode LCPU and FXCPU the time data setting can be set if the programmable controller CPU is in the RUN status For QCPU Q mode and LCPU the setting can be set regardless of the ON OFF status of the time setting device SM1028 For FXCPU the setting can be set for FX1n clock built in FXinc clock built in FX1s clock built in FX2n clock built in FX2nc when RTC cassette is installed FXu when RTC cassette is installed FX2c when RTC cassette is installed and FX3c clock built in only Note that an error for transfer time occurs in the time setting 3 Restrictions on using FXCPU a b c d When FXCPU is used the TN devices timer present values or CN devices counter present values cannot be accessed if the device numbers specified are split across 199 or earlier and 200 or later Since
157. an ON status and O an OFF status flickers under the scroll button during monitoring 2 Target CPU name 3 Communication path information Display the communication target CPU name specified on Communication Setting Wizard Display such information as the network type network number start I O address and station number 4 Logical station number Display the logical station number set for the utility setting type This number is not displayed when the program setting type is used Point Devices cannot be monitored if the connection destination is not established The transfer settings cannot be set during monitoring The devices cannot be monitored during gateway function communication 113 qe oway 1 yng uo suonelado EZZ AWN JOHUON Did ZL 7 2 4 Operation on Entry Device tab This tab is used to monitor the specified devices on a single screen at the same time Screen display PLC Monitor Utility kea Menu Online Help Device Batch Buffer Memory Entry Device Device Current Connect Coil ika Register device D 3 A A D2 g 7 Da 8 io Delete device D4 53 DS 25 Clear device 1 D o x o Y o Stop monitor Y 2 3 4 Item Description Register the device to be monitored The following screen is displayed by clicking the Register device button Item Description Device Enter the device to
158. and select the logical station number 12 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 12 Click the Test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 8 13 CC Link IE Field Network Communication This section provides the CC Link IE Field Network communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 13 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using CC Link IE Field Network communication Set the CC Link IE Field Network board Connect the personal computer to the CC Link IE Field Network iS Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Page 200 2 in this section Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on uy 7 Page 201 3 in this section Communicati
159. ard is used Numeral within O indicates station number QO6HCPU at normal station station number 1 on network number 1 is accessed Logical station number of 12 is used 194 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Checking the CC Link IE Controller Network board Check whether the personal computer is connected properly to CC Link IE Controller Network Operating procedure 1 Start gt All Programs gt MELSEC gt CC IE Control Utility BB CCIE Control utility ea a 7 2 Clickthe ser button Board 1 Channel No 151 Network No 1 GroupNo 0 Station No 1 Type Normal station Status Start data linking Board detail information Diagnostics Setting Stop monitor _ Channel No confim Close Parameter setting a 3 Set the following items and click the _ ts button Target board specification M Boad1 M Board2 M Board3 M Board 4 Routing parameter ene Channel No 151 E Network type CC IE Control Normal station 3 eae Mode Online ue Network type CCIE Control Normal station gt Network No 4 ak o Mode Online z G N i i 0 FP a FE Network No 13 Group No 03 StatonNo 23 roup iyo 3 5 a Station No 2 o 2 7 Driver setting Event
160. as 2 Relayed stations cannot be accessed through Q motion CPU S 3 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field 3 Network is not supported gt 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 5 5 Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No IP information system 283 284 4 Personal computer side port USB GOT1000 side port USB CPU side port Bus connection a Configuration GOT Bus Connected station CPU Relayed module USB a Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module CEEA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion an LCPU
161. ation CPU Relayed Network g Relayed station CPU QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x FACPL Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x Only FX1sCPU FX1NCPU FX1NCCPU FX2NCPU FX2NCCPU FX3GCPU FX3ucCPU can be used CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 13 For Gateway Function Communication This section describes the accessible devices and accessible ranges for gateway function communication 10 13 1 Accessible devices This section indicates the accessible devices for gateway function communication Only the following device is accessible for gateway function communication Device Gateway device Device name EG 10 13 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for gateway function communication 1 Configuration Programmable GOT controller CPU Ethernet T A Personal computer 2 Accessible ranges Only the connected GOT can be accessed SODIADP 9JAISSIIOY L EL OL uonesiunwiwoy uonouny emag JOY EVOL 275 1 0 1 4 For GX Simulator Communication This section describes the accessible devices and accessible ranges for GX Simulator communication 10 14 1 Accessible devices The accessibl
162. ation can be performed properly ES Page 185 3 in this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Personal computer MX Component Starting GX Developer GX Simulator Q02HCPU Logical station number of 9 is used 183 ainpssoid SSIDIY 6 8 UONBoIUNUWUOS JOJE NnuIS XD 6 8 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the 2 Enter 9 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number 3 Set the following items and click the Next gt ieee ee button El PC side I F GX Simulator CPU type oom y Station type Host station CPU type Q02 H Time out 10000 4 Enter a comment and click the button The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment GX Simulato
163. ation test complete 182 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 8 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 8 Click the Test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 8 9 GX Simulator Communication This section provides the GX Simulator communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 9 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing GX Simulator using ladder logic communication y Start GX Developer and GX Simulator Page 29 CHAPTER 2 y Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard K Page 184 2 in this section y On the communication test screen check whether a communic
164. ay Parameter Station No lt gt 1P Information Station No lt gt 1P Information FP Panels m al sema Erai Sting Interrupt Settings Interrupt Settings CPU 1 Operational settings me Communication Data Code Initial Timing Binary Code c r a C ASCII Code Always wait for OPEN Communication E possible at STOP time El IP Address Setting Send Frame Setting Input Format DEC zi Ethernet V2 0 IP Address 192 16801 ro I Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the KeepAlive C Use the Ping cone Ethernet parameters 00 N a Q p CPU 2 Operational settings D n E Communication Data Code Titel Ting Q e Do not wait for OPEN Communications muna impossible at STOP time T ASCII Code Always wait for OPEN Communication c possible at STOP time S IP Address Setting Send Frame Setting o Input Format DEC y Ethemet V2 0 IP Address 192 168 o 3 C reseso2 3 F Enable Online Change TCP Existence Confirmation Setting Use the KeepAlive Use the Ping cnet s jnpoy a9e11a u jauJayy3 Buisn usu uoyeoarunwwog Jeuleyla 28 147 148 3 Setting routing parameter setting 4 Set the following items on the Network Parameter Setting the Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Routing Information screen of GX Works2 For the routing parameters refer to the following appendix K5 Page 297 Appendix 1 Concept of Routing Par
165. ayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network male Roa LEU es Q i SE AA f o fot fof x gt gt MELSECNET H O O x x x x sierra Ethernet O x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x CC IE Field O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 268 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 1 0 11 For Q Series Bus Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for Q series bus communication 10 11 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for Q series bus communication Device Device Name Access Target Q02 H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q02PH QO6PH Q12PH Q25PH Device Device Name Access Target Q02 H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q02PH QO6PH Q12PH Q25PH Present value TN Contact TS Retentive timer Function input FX O Link special relay SB O Function output FY O Link spe
166. b14 Communication protocol 1 Serial communication Transmission control b15 0 Form 1 procedure CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 D8121 station number setting Specify the station number The station number can be specified in the range of 00H to OF b15 to bO D8121 Station number range 00H to OFH 3 D8129 time out judge time setting Specify the FXCPU time out judge time in 10ms units The setting range is as follows For FXon FX1s FXin FXinc FX3c FX3u FX3uc 1 to 255 10 to 2550ms For FXan FXanc 1 to 3276 10 to 32760ms If 0 is stored 100ms is set b15 to bO D8129 FXon FX1s FX1nc FX3c FXsuc 1 to 255 FXeanc 1 to 3276 Point When communication setting is performed turn on FXCPU again after writing to programmable controller When performing multi drop connection set the same communication settings for the devices However check that the station number is not overlapped The following shows an example of setting values to the special data registers M8002 1 H MOV H6080 D8120 WOY HOC 08121 Woy K20 D8129 The following shows the setting details of each special data register in the above program O D8120 Transmission control procedure Form 1 Communication protocol Serial communication Sum check Available H W type RS 485 Transmission speed 9600bps Stop bit 1 bit Parity N A Data length 7 bi
167. ber Logical station number 17 hd z 3 Set the following items and click the Next gt button i a PC side I F USB via GOT Time out 10000 4 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the GOT PLC VF GOT PLC VF Serial x button Communication setting Connect module CPU module X GOT PLC I F Serial Connect module CPU module Continued on next page 230 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page 5 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the PLC side VF acsuew Puma gt button a PLC side I F CPU module CPU type Q02 H 6 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the Network Es e button Network Juexsecnerniom gt Station type Other station Seta ras Network MELSECNET 10 H Mode MESETA Mode MELSECNET H 7 Set the following items and click the Next gt oe yo button none 3 3 SENEE Q02 H a CPU type Q02 H ss Network No 4 3 a nn Station No 8 25 Multiple CPU None 88 23 oO o 3 3 5 8 8 Enter a comment and click the button The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment GOT Transparent_Sample Registration complete 231
168. ble wa shs Bunelado jeuoissajoid dX SMOPUIM Buisn uaym LLZ 29 si7 uoleunByuoy wajs s 1 Z 2 1 2 When using Windows XP Home Edition Operating System 30 The following table lists the systems that can be configured for the use of Windows XP Home Edition Item Description Serial communication O Ethernet communication O CPU COM communication O CPU USB communication O MELSECNET H communication x CC Link IE Controller Network communication O Applicable board CC Link IE Controller Network board Applicable driver SW1DNC MNETG B or later CC Link IE Field Network communication O Applicable board CC Link IE Field Network board Applicable driver SW1DNC CCIEF J SW1DNC CCIEF B or later CC Link communication x CC Link G4 communication O Q series bus communication only when PC CPU module is used x GX Simulator communication O GX Simulator2 communication x Modem communication O Gateway function communication O GOT transparent communication O O Configurable x Not configurable Point The ASP function of VBScript cannot be used CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 1 3 When using Windows Vista Operating System The following table lists the systems that can be configured for the use of Windows Vista Item Description Serial communication O Ethernet communication CPU COM communication CPU USB communicatio
169. btained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software from other sources may harm your computer or steal information The screen shown on the left is displayed and the USB driver installation is complete 7 Click the CEZ button The software for this device has been successfully installed Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver sr Installation complete 332 APPENDIX 3 Windows 7 The following explains the procedure of USB driver installation for Windows 7 Operating procedure HS Device driver software was not successfully installed gt 1 Connect the personal computer and the Click here for details programmable controller CPU with USB cable and then turn on the programmable controller CPU The screen shown on the left is displayed E itu 2 Select System and Security from the Control E gt Control Panel y 42 Search Control Panel 2 Adjust your computer s settings View by Category Y Panel d System and Security User Accounts and Family Safety Review your computer s status Add or remove user accounts es Roe O Set up parental contol for any user To display the Control Panel select Start lt gt Control Find and fix problems x i fini ppearance an ersonalization Network and Internet Aa Change the theme Pa n el Ge Connect to the Internet Change deskt
170. ce2 only when accessing FX3u c CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU SSDIN9P 9 AISSSDIY YOL UOHESIUNWWOD WOOD Ndd 104 VOL 247 10 4 2 Accessible ranges 248 This section indicates the accessible ranges for CPU COM communication 1 Configuration Connected Relayed station CPU module Personal computer Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control 9 3 2 9 x CC IE Field 9 9 O gt E MELSECNET H O O x O O x QCPU Q mode Ethernet 9 x x O O x Serial communication os x O x O x CC Link O O O x O oF CC IE Field 9 O x o x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O s x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 For Q00J Q00UJ Q00 Q00U Q01 Q01UCPU restrictions on the number of mountable modules are appli
171. cial register SW O Function register FD O Step relay S x Special relay SM O Direct input DX x Special register SD O Direct output DY x Input relay X O Accumulator A x Output relay Y Q Z O Index register Internal relay M Q V x Latch relay L O R O File register Annunciator F O ZR O Edge relay V O Extended file register ER R x Link relay B O Link input J X O Data register D O Link output J Y O Link register W O Link relay J B O Direct link Contact TS O Link special relay J SB O Timer a Coil TC O Link register J W O Present value TN O Link special register J SW O Contact TS O Special direct buffer memory U G on Counter O 5 oi O O O Coil TC ST Present value TN O 1 In amulti CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 269 SODIASP SAISSIIOY pL OL uonesiunwwog sng sees O 104 LL OL 10 270 11 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for Q series bus communication 1 Another CPU on the same base can be accessed However another CPU cannot be accessed via the network of another CPU 2 Another CPU can be accessed via the MELSECNET H module controlled by the PC CPU module In this case the accessible ranges are as in MELSECNET H communication 3 Page 262 Sec
172. cription Label Name Display label names defined as structure Data Type Display data types set to data names Device Set device names to be assigned NN w w w l op 52 oC 32 a lt o 2 a 125 4 Assigning devices to structure array type labels Screen display Click Detail Setting on the Device column of System Label List Structured 1 0 4 0 3 a g 0 d Operating procedure Set the items on the screen Item Description Display elements of the structure array in tree format Structure Array The device setting of the element selected in the tree is displayed in the right area of the screen Label Name Display label names defined as the structure Data Type Display data types set to label names Set device names to be assigned Device names can be entered for the start array element only Device 126 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 3 4 Setting Structure Register edit and browse each data element that is configured in the structure managed in the LabelSpace Screen display Label Name Data Type 1 ST_datal Bit 2 ST_data2 Bit 3 ST_data3 Bit 4 ST_data4 Bit 5 ST_data5 Bit 6 ST_data6 Bit 7 ST_data7 Bit 8 ST_data8 Bit 9 ST_data9 Bit 10 sT_data10 Bit f 11 Item Description Reference Label Name Display a label name Display a data type of the label Page 123 Data Type _ Specify a data type from the Type Selection screen di
173. ct MELSECNET H board on the PC side UF If accessing the PLC CPU through a CC Link unit that is controlled by computer CPU please select CC Link board on the PC side VF Cancel lt Back Next gt Multiple CPU Nod Cancel f xt gt Finis Continued on next page Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button Enter 14 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Q series Bus Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q12H Multiple CPU No 3 205 ainpssoid ssa3dIY py 8 uonesiunwwoy sng Salas O pL 8 Continued from previous page 5 Enter a comment and click the button The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Registration complete 206 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the Q series bus communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure Target setting List view Connection test Logical staton number 14 0 Bus_Sample gt Delete TE PC UF By Communication Setup L Menu Help ri CEM Q Series Bus Q Series Bus CPU type Q12H
174. ct Workspace gt Reference Registration F Page 128 Section 7 3 5 ED Logi be Workspace W Reference Registration N p J F Structured Data Types System Label List Description car Num scr Continued on next page 76 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS Continued from previous page 4 Selecta Workspace that is to be referred and C MELSOFT Navigator Browse om Camata registered Page 128 Section 7 3 5 Workspace uso The referred and registered Workspace name is Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Label displayed on the Navigation window Select the system label name to display the referred system label list Reference WorkspaceW5001 BBD Logical Station Number AE Structured Data Types 5 8 System Label List Label Description T cap NUM SCRL A 5 Menu gt Save LabelSpace pees a pa I Page 119 Section 7 3 1 Delete LabelSpace D gt The system label is registered Refresh system label data for Control R Logical Station Number G Workspace For referring more than one Workspace add Export Import LabelSpace first and operate the procedure 2 to 4 System Label gt sjeqe7 wajshs Buisn p s Bato Alt F4 Description __ 40 A cap NUM SCRL JoyeBIAeN LAOSTAN U pasn sjeqe ulziInn 71 S Cont
175. ctory Click Browse and select the directory for installing in other directory Click Cancel for not installing Destination Folder evisos Browse lt Back E Cancel Continued on next page 7 8 Register the product ID Enter the product ID and click the button The product ID is printed on the license certificate included with the product Specify the installation destination folder If do not change the destination folder click the button In order to change the destination folder click the _8owe button and specify a new drive and folder Continued from previous page Em Would you like to install this device software Name Jungo Jungo 28 Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION instan Bontine E Always trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install Swe Would you like to install this device software Name MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Universa I Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Always trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device software is safe to install lt Windows XP gt Software Installation The software you are installing has not passed
176. d number As set by user 4 b4 Stop bit 0 1 As set by user b5 Sum check code 1 Yes As set by user b6 Online change 1 Enable As set by user 4 b7 Setting change As set by user As set by user 4 When using CH2 enter the values as set by the user 208 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 8 15 2 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using modem communication lt When Q series compatible C24 or L series compatible C24 is used gt Set the software switches i E ly Page 210 2 in this section a In the sequence program set the following items 1 Write the AT command ATSO 1 2 Set the initialization request ES Page 211 3 in this section Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Page 221 4 in this section Communication Setting Wizard On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly 1 E Page 223 5 in this section Complete 1 If normal communication cannot be performed refer to Flowchart for When Access cannot be Performed during Modem Communication Page 317 Appendix 6 and take corrective action lt When FXCPU is used gt ao F gt O Se Y 2 3 l 20 Set the FXCPU and connect it to the modem RA GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Se 8 3 y
177. d use it from controls i Act LogifalNumber 1 I 1 H Act Open h U li i ret Act GetDevice Temperature Data l ser app ication Act Close i Da A cal Basc Visual C Microsoft ISU ISU Excel Label Utility MX Component e System label database E Point O System labels Define labels one to one with devices and register the labels Structure can be used Structure consists of aggregate of various devices Set data types Any data types can be set as array e System labels used in MELSOFT Navigator can be utilized in MX Component O System label data base A system label data base is a data base to manage system labels 68 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS 5 1 1 Register system labels in MX Component Register a system label with Label Utility 1 Register system labels Operating procedure 1 O Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Register the system labeled with the following procedure uterine e i Nk Application gt MX Component gt Label Utility Undefined Name 3 To register System Label gt Label Utility starts Reference Workspace EA Logical Station Number F Structured Data Types 55 System Label List Description m MXLabelManager 2 Right click Undefined_name on the LabelSpace Menu M Edit E Help H If you want t
178. ddu nera A bee a RA a hs Wh Ad dats hee Be 276 10 15 For GX Simulator2 Communication 0 00 06 cece cee eee 277 10 15 31 Acc ssible devices chet dee dea cea enon es 277 10 15 2 Accessible rangeS sis dreser drin Aea nee nen net e nee eae 277 10 16 For GOT Transparent Communication 0 0 000 0 ccc cece een eens 278 10 16 1 Accessible devices ii Coke cha ow eS eae ek oes 278 10 16 2 Accessible ranges 0 nen e nde eee n eee nee 280 APPENDIX 297 Appendix 1 Concept of Routing Parameters 0 0 0 0 00000 eaa erae 297 Appendix 2 How to Configure Internet Intranet Environment 00000000000e 300 Appendix 2 1 Operating procedure oooooocooo eee 300 Appendix 2 2 Conditions of usable personal computers 0 00000 eee eee 301 Appendix 2 3 How to install Web server 00 0000 cece eee eee 302 Appendix 2 4 Setting the Internet access account 00000 eect e eee ee eee 303 Appendix 2 5 Releasing Web pageS 0 00 cece cee eee 307 Appendix 2 6 Checking whether Web server can be accessed properly 311 15 16 Appendix 3 RS 232 Cable Wiring Examples for Serial Communication 312 Appendix 3 1 QSeries 2 n on nannaa anaana eee eee 312 Appendix 3 2 ES a susie nee dos has 314 Appendix 4 Multi CPU System 2 0 00 000 e ees 315 Appendix 5 Number of Mountable Network Modules for QUOOJCPU QOOUJCPU QOOCPU QOOUCPU Q01CPU or QO1UCPU 2
179. ditor 7 Section 7 1 and the HTML editor CHAPTER 8 and the HTML editor Create a website using the text editor On the website form the controls for gt MX Component controls to be used in 1 VBScript ActProgType On the website form the controls for VBScript ActUtIType MX Component controls to be used in 1 Set the property of the formed controls ES CHAPTER 8 Set the property of the formed controls Set the logical station number only ES CHAPTER 8 Y Create a program using the functions supported by corresponding controls Debug the program using PLC Monitor Utility Das LA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual Yes Y Section 4 4 PLC Monitor Utility Operating Procedure Completion of user application 1 A MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual Point For starting the Internet intranet environment refer to the following appendix 5 Page 300 Appendix 2 How to Configure Internet Intranet Environment CHAPTER 4 OPERATION PROCEDURES 4 4 PLC Monitor Utility Operating Procedure The following is the PLC Monitor Utility operating procedure Select the setting type Program setting type Utility setting type Start Communication Setup ai Utility and set the communication gt Section 7 1 Start PLC Monitor Utility s
180. e UDP IP station number for GX Developer 3 Station number 1 i MX Component TCP IP Set different station numbers as the TCP IP station number for MX Component and UDP IP station number for GX Developer If they are set to the same station number an error will occur on the Ethernet module side Considerations for using CC Link modules 1 Software version of CC Link master local module For CC Link master local modules used in CC Link communication use modules of software version N or later Modules of software version M or earlier do not operate normally Considerations for using serial communication modules 1 Serial communication a b On any serial communication modules remote PAUSE operation will result in an error for all connections The FX extended port is required when performing the serial communication using FXon FX1s FXa1n c FX3G or FXau c CPU 2 Considerations for connecting personal computer and serial communication module a When using QJ71C24 R2 of function version A An MX Component application can use only either of CH1 and CH2 When the MELSOFT product GX Developer GOT or the like is using one channel the application cannot use the other channel When QJ71C24 R2 of function version B is used the appl
181. e or ISDN Outside line number Set the number as required when calling through the outside line Port Select the COM port number which is connected to the modem Set the phone number of the target Connection target The previously registered phone numbers in the telephone directory can be specified by clicking the 8rowse button Page 102 2 in this section AT command Modem standard Use the AT command set on the modem When a difficulty of line connection occurs using the standard AT command create an AT AT command setting command with referring to the manual of the modem and the content displayed by clicking the ara button Page 104 3 in this section Page 106 4 Details settin Display the Detail setting screen Deis sets button pay me a seung in this section AIN dnyas uopeojunwwoo 12 u 19S BUI JOBUUOD UO suonelado 7 12 101 2 Setting TEL data Set the telephone numbers used on the Connect Line screen Close E Construction Painting Cancel Factory A 5 Construction List of registered E Paintng New call number phone numbers New group Edit a Move groug Delete Find Display cursor position Call number Sale Select Outside line number Comment Read file Write file Display contents Item Description List of registered phone Display group n
182. e Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Registration complete 192 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 4 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the MELSECNET H communication settings using the logical station number set in 3 in this section Operating procedure Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test 51 Logical station number 11 MNETH_Sample CPU type Network No 1 Station No 1 Multiple CPU No 2 ao6PH E pet Communication Setup Utility Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 11 MNETH_Sample Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication Click Se lt 7 Communication test complete 1 2 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 11 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 11 Click the Tet button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal ter
183. e Web server operation checking test page offered by MX Component Check that the system date and system time of the server are displayed on the Web browser Point O f NetTest asp cannot be accessed properly the Web pages using MX Component cannot be accessed either In such a case reconfirm the Web server settings and Web client browser setting Even if the settings are correct the Web pages may not be displayed because communication cannot be performed properly due to dense traffic or the like of the communication line In this case check the status of the communication line O NetTest asp is stored in the following folder user specified folder Act Sample VBScript SampleASP jUSWwUuo AUy j9ue 1 u j9uJe u Bun6yUOD 0 MOH Z xIpuaddy Ayedoid passao9e aq ues Janes qa y Jaujeym Bun9ay 92 xIpueddy 311 Appendix 3 Rs 232 Cable Wiring Examples for Serial Communication Appendix 3 1 Q Series 312 The connector specifications are indicated below Signal Direction Pin number Signal Code Signal Name n Q series compatible C24 lt personal computer 1 CD Receive carrier detection 0 2 RD RXD Receive data auauaausssssasasasasssasassasesesesae 3 SD TXD Send data _ 4 DTR ER Data terminal ready _ _ _ __ 5 SG Send ground A MAAAAAAAkAkA gt 6 DSR DR Data set ready H 7 RS RTS Request to send Ss 8 CS CTS Clear to send 2 9 RI
184. e a Saw ites 166 8 7 CG Link Communication dica as rd a e neers 170 BL ACCESS procedure coi a A o a dd 170 8 8 CC LinkG4 Communicati0N 0ooooooocococororrr eens 175 8 8 1 Switch settings of CC Link G4 module ooocoooccccccccoo coco 175 8 82 ACCESS procedure ii tad 176 8 9 GX Simulator Communication 0 0 00 0000 cette eens 183 8 9 1 ACCESS procedure ooo 183 8 10 GX Simulator2 Communication 0 0000 60 tte eens 186 8 10 1 Access procedure x4 ie e24ddacmentediwse Me ard tbat candav bas white clea mand 186 8 11 MELSECNET H Communication 00 000 00 ccc teen eee 189 8 111 ACCESS procedure tai pets cei dws Sided ab odes as 189 8 12 CC Link IE Controller Network Communication 00 0000 ce cece eee 194 8 12 1 Access procedure cui a be ad ad ee De ne eee 194 8 13 CC Link IE Field Network Communication 0000 00 cece eee 199 8 13 1 ACCESS procedure o 199 8 14 Q Series Bus Communication 006 teeta 204 8 14 11 Access proced ra 0 ia ba tla ea A baad deceit ks 204 8 15 Modem Communication 000 0000 teen teens 208 8 15 1 Switch settings of Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 208 8 15 2 ACCESS Procedure rasenta mirena eA hig da 209 8 16 Gateway Function Communication s s s 00000 cece teens 224 8 16 1 Access procedure sis uve Sw es nk ed ee Mote eet REI as 224 8 17 GOT Transparent Communication
185. e controller CPU using Q series bus communication Mount the programmable controller CPU and PC CPU on the same base Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Set the PC CPU module QA PC CPU module manual Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard Page 205 2 in ails section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Page 207 Jn this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section gooooo 000000 000000 P i PC CPU module Q12HCPU No 3 Logical station number of 14 is used q pE 204 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number 14 y ce os E Caution If accessing the PLC CPU through a MELSECNET H unit that is controlled by computer CPU please sele
186. e devices of other station during GX Simulator communication depends on the other station device settings set on the device manager of GX Simulator For other station device setting refer to the following manual LAGX Simulator Version 7 Operating Manual 10 14 2 Accessible ranges The following table indicates the accessible ranges for GX Simulator communication Whether the target CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Target CPU Target Station QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Qmode CPU V CPU Host station O x x x x O Other station O x x x x x 276 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 1 0 1 5 For GX Simulator2 Communication This section describes the accessible devices and accessible ranges for GX Simulator2 communication 10 15 1 Accessible devices The accessible devices during GX Simulator2 communication depend on the device supported by GX Simulator2 For details refer to the following manual LAGX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common 10 15 2 Accessible ranges The following table indicates the accessible ranges for GX Simulator2 communication Whether the target CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Target CPU Target Station QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Qmode CPU V CPU Other station O x O x x O SODIASP SAISSIIOY pG OL UONE9 UNWLOS ZIO eINWIS X9
187. e routing parameters to the request source and relayed stations 1 To the request source set the data to access the request target network number 3 To the relayed station 1 set the data to access the request target network number 3 To the relayed station 2 set the data to access the request source network number 1 Request Relayed Relayed SOUE station 1 station 2 lla Network No 1 H Network No 2 Network No 3 J T T T l Request target APPENDIX d Multi level 3 four or more networks Set the routing parameters to the request source and relayed stations k To the request source set the data to access the request target network number 4 To the relayed station 1 the nearest relayed station to the request source set the data to access the request target network number 4 To the relayed station 2 the nearest relayed station to the request target set the data to access the request source network number 1 To the relayed station 3 relayed station other than 1 and 2 set the data to access the request target network number 4 and request source network number 1 Request Relayed Relayed Relayed station 1 _______ station 3 station 2 i C Network No 1 H FC Network No 2 H EC Network No 3 H H NetworkNo 4 ATA T Request target 1 The following explains the case when the request source is the person
188. eas 104 ZOL 239 10 3 For Ethernet Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for Ethernet communication 1 0 3 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for Ethernet communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU Access Target Link special relay SB Link special register SW Step relay S Direct input DX Direct output DY Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QscPu FXcPu Q mode Function input FX O x O x x Function output FY Q x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O O x Special register SD O O O x Input relay X O O O O O Output relay Y O O O O O Internal relay M O O O O O Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O O x Edge relay V Q x O O x Link relay B O x O O x Data register D O O O O O Link register W O x O O x Contact TS O x O O O a Coil TC O x O O O Present value TN O x O O O Contact TS O x O O O ae Coil TC O x O O O Present value TN O x O O O Retentive Contact TS Q x O O x timer Coil TC O x O O x ST Present value TN O x O O x O x O O x O x O O x x x x x O x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Accumulator A 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 For the supported FXCPU and devices refer to the manu
189. ecial relays O When checking which system is being accessed System A or System B e Indicate system A system B of a redundant system System A i non f SM1511 identification Remain ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant system is running flag At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Error code System A System B 7 System B 6120 occurrence System not determined SM1512 identification SM1511 ON OFF OFF flag SM1512 OFF ON OFF When checking the control standby system status e Indicate the CPU module control standby status e Remain ON OFF even if the tracking cable is disconnected while the redundant SM1515 Control system is running standby Control Standby At the time of TRK CABLE ERR Error code system system system 6120 occurrence System not determined SM1516 ae SM1515 ON OFF OFF sM1516 OFF ON OFF 318 APPENDIX 2 Operation at occurrence of system switching When system switching occurs during access to the Redundant CPU after selection of Control system access is continued as described below a Connection via other than MELSECNETIH Ethernet or CC Link IE Controller Network Access to the control system after system switching is continued The following shows an example of CPU direct connection Lop Connection to control system l Standby system E aa E MX
190. ecify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No IP information system The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base Accessible to FX3eCPU FXs3uc CPU only Continued on next page CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Field 9 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication o x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x Q motion CPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x FXCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 13 5 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 253 seBue jq ss 20y z 9 0L UOHEIUNWWOD ASN Ndd 404 SOL 1 0 6 For CC Link Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for CC Link communication 1 0 6 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the acces
191. ed station Relayed CPU module ES gt EA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Qmotion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 3 4 x 3 x CC IE Field 2 E 9 MELSECNET H O O x x O x CPU gt a Ethernet O x x x O x Q mode Q series compatible C24 ETE Serial communication O x O x O x Q motion CPU CC Link O O O x O x Multi drop connection 5 O x O x x x Independent mode CC IE Field 4 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x Ethernet x x x x x x LCPU L series compatible C24 Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x Multi drop connection i O x O x x x Independent mode 5 dict 2 3 4 5 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU Relayed stations cannot be accessed through Q motion CPU Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported Indicates the CH2 side setting The CH1 side is fixed to the independent mode 285 seBue
192. ed that the logical 3 D o oa O U E a Collect device data using this logical station number 157 8 4 Ethernet Communication When Using CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module This section provides the procedure for the Ethernet communication with in case of using CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 4 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using Ethernet communication Connect the CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module and personal computer Connect the CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module and CC Link IE Field Network Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Personal computer CC Link IE Field Network m Ethernet adapter module 5 Page 159 2 in this section E Page 161 3 in this section CC Link IE Field Network module 158 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard T
193. ed to some network cards Page 316 Appendix 5 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 4 Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No IP information system 5 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 6 Accessible to FX3sCPU FX3ucyCPU only Continued on next page CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x Q motion CPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x FXCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 249 seBue jq ss 20y z p 0L UOHESIUNWWOD WOO Ndd 104 VOL 10 5 For CPU USB Co
194. ed using modem communication refer to the following flowchart and take corrective action Reexamine the wiring switch settings parameter settings etc an normal modem communication be executed using GX Developer Did the communication test of Communication Setup Utility complete normally 1 Reexamine the setting of the logical station number 2 Take corrective action for the error that occurred Did an error occur in the user program that was executed Reexamine the user program Complete uonesiunwwoyg wapo Buunp pewoLed 2q JoUue9 ssad9y UYM 104 WeYOMO 4 9 xipuaddy 317 Appendix 7 Compatibility with Redundant CPU This section explains the compatibility of MX Component with the Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 1 Redundant CPU specification In Redundant CPU specification select either Control system or Not specified to access the compatible Redundant CPU e Control system Connect to the control system and continue to access the control system in response to system switching e Not specified Connect to the connection target programmable controller CPU as before 1 Redundant CPU specification setting can either be set on the utility setting type Communication Setting Wizard screen or on the program setting type control property Point To judge which system in the Redundant CPU system is being accessed by MX Component monitor the following sp
195. ems and click the Next gt button PC side I F Modem Connect module QJ71C24 Time out 10000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button Line type Tone Outside line number None Port COM1 Call number RERARRDARA Enter the programmable controller side phone number AT command Modem standard 221 ainpesoid ss 29y Z S 8 uonediluNnWWOD WEepoY SL 8 Continued from previous page 5 Set the following items and click the ne gt Please select the PLC side VF button PLC side VF Modem X Communication setting TD B E PLC side I F Modem Module type QJ71C24 Station No 0 Transmission speed 19200 6 Setthe following items and click the Next gt button Station type Host station CPU type Q25H Multiple CPU None 7 Enter a comment and click the button The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Registration complete 222 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 5 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the modem communication settings using the logical station number set in 4 in this section Operating procedure By Communication Setup U Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station
196. ent moved used for operation m MX MX o Component Component 7 T z E l l CEEA Ga Enter and save communication Read communication setting data and setting data establish communication path l Shorten the time for operations 23 JUSUOdWOD XW JO MSINISAD L 4 Label function This function allows users to create a program with labels Programs can be created without considering device numbers and devices can be read or written using labels names Execute the processing of function ReadDeviceRandom2 iReturnCode DotUtlType ReadDeviceRandom2 Amount of production Structured data type label 3 DO Word objData CN200 Word D1 Word Specify the label name Execute the processing of function ReadDeviceRandom2 iReturnCode DotUtIType ReadDeviceRandom2 AlarmArray Array type label 3 Pet 0 DO Word objectValue 1 D1 Word 2 D2 Word Free from complex use of data type dedicated methods 5 Device monitor function Utilizing PLC Monitor Utility enables users to monitor the status of the specified device and change its data a al MX mponent ES Device status is checked R _ l 1 Set and co
197. entified Publisher gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Change when these notifications appear gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer After executing the exe file reinstall the product If this product is not installed properly at this time restart the personal computer b The Program Compatibility Assistant screen may be displayed after installation Select This program installed correctly and restart the personal computer This program might not have installed correctly If this program didn t install correctly try reinstalling using settings that are compatible with this version of Windows p Program Setup Launcher Publisher InstallShield Software Corporation Location F EnvMEL SETUP EXE Reinstall using recommended settings gt This program installed correctly Cancel What settings are applied 56 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION If Reinstall using recommended settings is selected the Windows XP SP2 compatibility mode is automatically set Disable the Windows XP SP2 compatibility mode by the following procedure and install the product again 2 SETUP EXE Properties General Compatibilty Securty Details Previous Versions if you have problems with this program and it worked co
198. er R can be specified only when accessing FX3GCPU or FX3u c CPU In a multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU The device can be used to execute Read WriteDeviceRandom Read Write DeviceRandom2 Get SetDevice or Get SetDevice2 only when accessing FX3u c CPU CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 12 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for Modem communication 1 When using Q series compatible C24 and L series compatible C24 a Configuration Connected Connected Relayed Modem Relayed network Subscriber line a a Bea Modem Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed E Relayed Relayed station CPU module The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 4 9 4 x CC IE Field 9 2 a MELSECNET H O O x O x x Ethernet O x x O x x aa CPU a Q series compatible
199. erent workspace add the LabelSpace Rename sbeSpec el lt gt Page 131 Section 7 3 7 Save LabelSpace S Ctri s Delete Labelspacet The labels referred from controls are updated Logical Station Number G Workspace W Export Import System Labet gt Exit Alt F4 Description car NUM SCRL Registration complete sjeqe7 waysks Buisn G juauodulo XW ul sjeqe was s JajsiBay L G 71 2 Deleting system labels Operating procedure Menu M Edit E Help H 1 Select Delete for a system label to be deleted LabelSpace Label Delete SystemLabelName Data Type Reference Workspace H Logical Station Number AR Structured Data Types fim System Label List Label Description car num ScRL ren 2 WD Menu gt Save LabelSpace pr ee I1 Page 119 Section 7 3 1 Delete Labelspace D The system label is deleted Refresh system label data for Control R Logical Station Number G gt 3 q car num sert Menu M Edit E Help H Add LabelSpace Rename LabelSpace A Save LabelSpace S tries Delete LabelSpace D Logical Station Number G Tf you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace 3 WD Menu gt Refresh system label data for Control lt Page 131 Section
200. eries compatible C24 manual CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE b For 1 n communication Module 1 or Setting Setting value b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Synchronous operation Switch 1 CH1 communication speed CH1 transmission setting 07E6H Switch 2 CH1 communications protocol 0008H Switch 3 CH2 communication speed CH2 transmission setting 07E7H Switch 4 CH2 communications protocol 0000H Switch 5 Module station number As set by user 1 Settings of CH1 and CH2 are indicated below b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO CH1 side CH2 side Setting Bit Description CH1 transmission CH2 transmission setting setting bO Operation setting Match to module 2 setting b1 Data bit Match to module 2 setting b2 Parity bit Match to module 2 setting b3 Odd even number parity Match to module 2 setting b4 Stop bit Match to module 2 setting b5 Sum check code Match to module 2 setting b6 Online change Match to module 2 setting b7 Setting change Match to module 2 setting uoneosiunwwoy jenas 18 se npou uoeorunwwo jenas Jo SHuINesS 1 g 135 b7 b6 Module 2 136 ae Setting Setting value b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Independent operation Switch 1 CH1 communication speed CH1 transmission setting 1 EEE Set to satisfy t
201. ersion 10 4 User programs created in the English environment are applicable to the English environment only cannot be used in the other environment 5 To operate VBScript use Internet Explorer version 5 00 2919 6307 or later 6 When Windows XP Home Edition is used the ASP function cannot be used 7 When using Visual Studio 2005 on Windows Vista Visual Studio 2005 Service Pack 1 or Visual Studio 2005 Service Pack 1 Update for Windows Vista is required 8 When using Visual Studio 2008 on Windows 7 Visual Studio 2008 Service Pack 1 is required 9 When using Microsoft Excel 2003 or Microsoft Access 2003 on Windows 7 Microsoft Office 2003 Service Pack 3 or later is required 10 64 bit Microsoft Excel 2010 and 64 bit Microsoft Access 2010 are not supported Operating systems and hardware requirements Hardware requirements Operating system CPU Memory Windows XP Windows Vista 32 bit Windows 7 64 bit Windows 7 Core 2 Duo 2GHz or higher is Intel 1GB or more recommended 2GB or more Point When creating a user program select x86 32 bits Target CPU CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 4 Applicable Programmable Controller CPUs The following are the applicable programmable controller CPUs Programmable i Module model controller series QOOJCPU QOOUJCPU QOOCPU
202. es using MX Component will not perform in the environment where a test using the sample page is not conducted properly Check the traffic noise and others of the communication line to operate the sample page properly 300 APPENDIX Appendix 2 2 Conditions of usable personal computers The following are the conditions of the personal computers that can be used as a Web server and a Web client 1 Personal computer that can be used as Web server factory side When using the personal computer as a Web server use the personal computer that satisfies all of the following conditions 1 to 4 Description Any of the following Operating Systems is operating on the personal computer Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System P Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System eens Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Condition 2 The personal computer can be connected to the Internet or intranet Condition 3 When Web pages are released on the Internet external access must not be inhibited by a firewall or the like Condition 4 MX Component is
203. ettings by following the 7 y instructions of wizard CHAPTER 8 After the transfer setting screen is Section 6 1 Section 7 2 y displayed select the program setting type Start PLC Monitor Utility a onton WY Press the wizard button on the transfer setting screen and set the target serring After the transfer setting screen li is displayed select the utility Section 6 1 4 setting type Section 7 2 Is connection destination correct Look at the connection image diagram to check Select the logical station number set on Communication Setup Utility Click the image diagram of the location you want to correct and make setting again lt Section 7 2 CHAPTER 9 y Select the monitor from among three tabs according to the application S k Section 7 2 y Press the monitor start button y Monitor execution ainpesosd Bunesedo Ayn JOHUON Dld by 67 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS System labels are labels that can be used with sharing them with multiple projects by opening devices of programmable controller projects and motion controller projects as system labels Therefore programming efficiency is improved As the device assignment settings are changed in bulk device assignment changes on applications are not required 5 1 Using System Labels Register a label using Label Utility of MX Component an
204. evelopment environment included in SWnDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works n version GX Simulator MELSECNET H board Generic product name for SWnD5C LLT E SWnD5C LLT EA SWnD5C LLT EV and SWnD5C LLT EVA n version EA means a volume license product and EV an updated product Generic term for Q80BD J71LP21S 25 and Q80BD J71BR11 Abbreviation for MELSECNET H interface board CC Link IE Controller Network board Generic term for Q80BD J71GP21 SX and Q80BD J71GP21S SX Abbreviation for CC Link IE Controller Network interface board CC Link IE Field Network board Abbreviation for Q81BD J71GF11 T2 CC Link IE Field Network interface board CC Link board Generic term for Q80BD J61BT11N and Q81BD J61BT11 Abbreviation for CC Link system master local interface board QCPU Generic term for Q00J Q00UJ Q00 Q00U Q01 Q01U Q02 Q02H Q02PH Q02U QO3UD QO3UDE Q04UDH Q04UDEH QO6H Q06PH QO6UDH QO6UDEH Q10UDH Q10UDEH Q12H Q12PH Q12PRH Q13UDH Q13UDEH Q20UDH Q20UDEH Q25H Q25PH Q25PRH Q26UDH Q26UDEH Q50UDEH and Q100UDEH Built in Ethernet port QCPU Generic term for QO3UDE Q04UDEH QO6UDEH Q10UDH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q26UDEH Q50UDEH and Q100UDEH LCPU Built in Ethernet port CPU Generic term for L02 L26CPU BT Generic term for built in Ethernet port QCPU and LCPU FXCPU Generic term for FXo FXos FXon FX1 FX1n FXinc FX1s FXu FX2c FX2n
205. f own board z gt Link special relay for CC Link SB Link special relay of own board o Q Link special register for CC Link SW Link special register of own board A 3 Remote input X RX 2 Remote output Y RY S Link register W Remote register write area for CC Link eke ae Remote register read area for CC Link WR RWr Buffer memory ML Buffer memory of own station CC Link module ai MC Random access buffer in buffer memory of own station CC Link module Automatic refresh buffer MF Automatic refresh buffer of own station CC Link module 255 10 6 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for CC Link communication 1 Configuration HH Connected Connected Relayed T station CPU module module ES ERT CC Link Personal computer yed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs and own board CC Link board are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network ee See a esa Q is EXCPU CCIE Had o oF oF or oF x QCPU Q mode MELSECNET H O O x O O x Q motion CPU 1 Ethernet O x x O O x Serial commun
206. forming gateway function communication execute ping in the MS DOS mode before starting communication using MX Component When normal C gt ping 192 168 0 1 Reply from 192 168 0 1 bytes 32 time lt 10ms TTL 32 When abnormal C gt ping 192 168 0 1 Request timed out 9 INp3201d ssa00y 9L 8 uonesjunuwoy vonouny emae 918 If ping does not pass through check the settings of the GOT and the settings of the Windows side IP address and others 225 3 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Please select the PC side VF PC side VF Ethernet board Communication setting Connect module GOT Ed Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF Ethernet module Communication setting Module type cot x Host IP Address 192 168 0 1 Continued on next page 226 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the Enter 16 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Ethernet boa
207. from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU the corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a system CAUTION The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU forced output and operating status changes must be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured The operation failure may cause the injury or machine damage CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTO 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION
208. g Open is executed from the personal computer with the Ethernet module not executing the close processing Close the open processing Open from the personal computer is not terminated normally until the Ethernet module performs a target existence check and executes the close processing Close When terminating the open processing Open early from the personal computer shorten the target existence check starting interval setting of the Ethernet module The default setting of target existence check starting interval of the Ethernet module is 10 minutes Replacement of Ethernet module If the Ethernet modules are changed during Ethernet communication due to debugging failure or the like the other node personal computer must be restarted Because the Ethernet addresses MAC addresses differ between devices Simultaneous access when using Q series compatible Ethernet module The following conditions should be satisfied when communication is performed simultaneously from multiple personal computers to the same module using the TCP IP protocol Q series compatible E71 module except QJ71E71 100 whose first five digits of the serial number is 02122 or higher and whose function version is B or later e Using GX Developer Version 6 05F or later set MELSOFT connection in the Ethernet parameter open systen 5 Unlocking password when using QJ71E71 The range where the password can be unlocked by remote operation is up to the connecti
209. he application of CH1 Switch 2 CH1 communications protocol Switch 3 CH2 communication speed CH2 transmission setting 07E6H Switch 4 CH2 communications protocol 0005H Switch 5 Module station number As set by user 1 Settings of CH1 and CH2 are indicated below b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 CH1 side CH2 side Setting Bit Description CH1 transmission CH2 transmission setting setting bO Operation setting 0 independent 1 synchronous b1 Data bit 1 8 1 8 b2 Parity bit 1 Yes 1 Yes b3 Odd even number parity 0 Odd number 0 Odd number b4 Stop bit 0 1 0 1 b5 Sum check code 1 Yes 1 Yes b6 Online change 2 1 enable 1 enable b7 Setting change 1 enable 1 enable 2 When the communication protocol is set to GX Developer connection 0H the online change bit b6 setting is invalidated and the online change is enabled regardless of the online change setting For details refer to Q series compatible C24 manual CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 FX extended port Set the FXCPU parameters with GX Works2 before using FX extended port to perform communication Execute either of the following two setting methods by following the instruction described on the reference page To use the PLC parameters Page 137 2 a in this section e To write values to special data registers D8120 D8121 D8129 in a sequence program For FXonCPU only this method is applicable 45 Page 138 2 b
210. he following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Please select the PC side VF PC side VF Ethernet board 54 Communication setting Connect module CC E Field Ethernet adapter Protocol TCP y Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF CC E Field Ethernet adapter v Communication setting 192 168 3 30 Host IP Address Continued on next page Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button Enter 4 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the nex gt button PC side I F Ethernet board Connect module CC IE Field Ethernet adapter Protocol TCP Time out 60000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F CC IE Field Ethernet adapter Host IP Address 192 168 3 30 159 eunpesoid SSSIDY p 8 aInpow Jajdepy J9u19UI3 YOMON Pl9ly Jl AUN IO Burst USYM uoeounWWOD zaua 8 Continued from previous page Please select the Network Station type Other station Single 7 CPU type Q13UDH X 160 The Communication wizard has finis
211. hed collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment Ethernet adapter_Sample Registration complete 5 Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Other station Single 6 Set the following items and click the Next button CPU type Q13UDH Multiple CPU None 7 Enter a comment and click the button CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the Ethernet communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure nication Setup Uilty aa Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number ethernet adapter_Sample z Delete IM ill E Ethernet FE E sua PC UF Ethernet CPU type Q13UDH Protocol rep Module type CC E Field ADP Time out 60000 ms Host PAddress 192 168 3 30 Network No 1 Station No 1 Multiple CPU None s unication Setup Utilit Ea Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 4 Ethernet adapter_Sample z Test Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication 2 ms el Test Click Communication test complete 1 2 Click the lt lt Target
212. ication can use both channels Considerations of modem communication 1 Simultaneous modem communications The simultaneous modem communications using MX Component and other applications GX Developer or the like cannot be performed Do nat perform a modem communication using other applications during a modem communication using MX Component If modem communications are simultaneously performed using MX Component and other application this will result in a communication error disconnection of telephone line or similar problem 2 Considerations for using telephone line a b c Do not use the call waiting phone line On the call waiting phone line data corruption telephone line disconnection or similar problem may occur due to interrupt reading sounds Do nat connect the line to master slave phones If the handset of the slave phone is lifted while the telephone line is connecting to the master slave phones the telephone line may be disconnected Use an analog 2 wire type telephone line When using a digital line use a terminal adapter When the telephone line is 4 wire type the line may not be connected depending on the wiring type of the modular jack For the 4 wire type conduct connection tests in advance to check for connections 3 Considerations for using cellular phone a Modem for radio communication using a cellular phone Although the modem name is different according to the ma
213. ication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x E E tl O OF x ox 9 x MELSECNET H O O x O O x DAA Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x CC IE Field x x x x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 1 Relayed stations cannot be accessed through Q motion CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 256 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 1 0 7 For CC Link G4 Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for CC Link G4 communication 1 0 7 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for CC Link G4 communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Function input FX O Function output FY Function register FD Special relay SM Special register SD Input relay X Output relay Y Internal relay M Latch relay L Annunciator F Edge relay V Present value TN Link relay B S S Data register D gt pl rs Link register W 3
214. ier gt AllPrograms 2 Search programs and files Shutdown N Adjust your computer s settings Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Network and Internet Connect to the Internet View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Add a device Connect to a projector Adjust commonly used mobility settings Programs Uninstall a program 2 a b Control Panel System and Security y Control Panel Home EA View by Category Y User Accounts and Family Safety Add or remove user accounts Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display y 43 Search Control Panel Pl O Start gt Control Panel Select System and Security Select Change User Account Control settings Review your computer s status and resolve issues Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems Restore your computer to an earlier time System and Security Network and Internet Hardware and Sound 7 m dd Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status User Accounts and Family Allow a program through Windows Firewall S
215. ii El PC side I F CC IE Field board Board No 1st module Continued on next page 201 Continued from previous page 4 Please select the Network Station type Other station Single y 5 Please select the Other station r Other station setting SS Q13UDH y Network No 1 Station No Do 6 The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment CC E Field_Sample Registration complete 202 Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Other station Single Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q13UDH Network No 1 Station No 1 Multiple CPU None Enter a comment and click the button CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 4 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the CC Link IE Field Network communication settings using the logical station number set in 3 in this section Operating procedure fy Communication Setup Utility 1 Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 13 CC E Field_Sample z Delete IM E CCE Field A a i E aa PC VF CC E Field CPU type Q13UDH Board No No 1 Network No 1 Station No a Multiple CPU None Ey Communication Setup Utili Menu Help Ta
216. ing System Generic term for Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System Windows 7 Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System and Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System 32 bit Windows 7 is used for indicating 32 bit version only and 64 bit Windows 7 is used for indicating 64 bit version only Ses Generic term for Microsoft Excel 2003 Microsoft Excel 2007 and Microsoft Excel 2010 32 bit version 20 Term Description Access Generic term for Microsoft Access 2003 Microsoft Access 2007 and Microsoft Access 2010 32 bit version Visual Basic NET Generic term for Visual Basic version Visual Studio 2005 Visual Studio 2008 and Visual Studio 2010 Visual C 9 NET Abbreviation for creation of an application using NET Framework System label Generic term for label names assigned to each device lt can be used instead of devices in programs 21 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS The following are the definitions of terms used in this manual 1 Logical station number The connection target information required to open the communication line is combined into one data using Communication Setup Utility and that data is provided with a logical number This number can be used with the utility setting type only
217. ing aware of the complicated parameters of any communication In the user program the communication line can be connected by simply setting the logical station number set on Communication Setting Wizard for the ACT control or the NET control property or into a user program Program setting type A user program is created without using Communication Setup Utility Set the ACT control settings for the corresponding communication on the property window directly or within the user program The required settings for the properties differ depending on the ACT control Comparison The following table compares the utility setting type and program setting type Item Utility setting type Program setting type Communication settings can be set easily using Communication Setting Wizard All communication settings can be set in the In program creation communication can be performed by user program Feature merely setting the parameter logical station number on Communication settings can be changed flexibly Communication Setting Wizard in the user program The number of development processes can be reduced Used ACT control ActUtlType ActMLUtIType ActProgType ActMLProgType Used NET control DotUtIType when labels are used Communication Setup A Used Not used Utility How to connect PLC A A Change the settings every connection E Select the logical station number 9 9 y Monitor Utility Use the wizard
218. initialization enabled gt MO M3 x10 x12 x13 Y10 A __j__j _ _ _y 130 2371024 Initiali Initiali Connecti Abnormal Initiali Initiali pccessib zation c zation c on in pr complet zation r zation e lle ompletio ompletio ogress ion equest nabled n flag n lt Set modem connection channel No MO a3H TOP HO H2E K1 K1 J71C24 faccessib fle lt Set GX Developer connection Top HO H36 K1 K1 lt Set auto modem initialization To HO H2007 K1 K1 lt Set callback function TO HO H2001 HOF K1 gt Continued on next page Point This sample sequence program is installed into the following folders after installation of MX Component User specified folder Act Samples GppW QJ71C24Callback_Number 216 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page y lt Set the data for callback To HO H2101 H8001 K1 lt Set the data for callback To HO H2102 8002 K1 lt Set the data for callback gt To HO H2103 H8003 K1 lt Set registration data bytes gt TO HO H1B00 K80 K1 lt Set telephone number smov e s D1 lt Set no external line Mov K255 D10 lt set line type gt Mo K D11 lt Writes the connection data To HO H1B2A DO K40 lt Set registration data bytes TO HO H1B29 K80 K1 np vosd ssa00y Z GL 8 UONEDIUNWWOD Wspo 9 8 lt Set telephone number Mov 2 D1
219. installed and settings are set for communication with the programmable controller CPU 2 Personal computer that can be used as Web client office side When using the personal computer as a Web client use the personal computer that satisfies both of the following conditions 1 and 2 Description Any of the following Operating Systems is operating on the personal computer Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Condition 1 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System sJajndulo9 jeuosied ajqesn jo suonIpuoy zz xipueddy JUBWUOJIAUZ j9ue yu jouJaju BANBYUOD 0 MOH Z xipuaddy Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System Condition 2 The personal computer can be connected to the Internet or intranet 301 Appendix 2 3 How to install Web server Install the Web server in the following method 1 When using Windows XP Professional Operating procedure 1 0 Start gt
220. inued on next page 11 Continued from previous page 6 Menu gt Refresh system label data for Control lt gt Page 131 Section 7 3 7 The labels referred from controls are updated Menu M Edit E Help H Add LabelSpace N Delete System Label Name Data Type Rename LabelSpace A 1 Start lamp Bit Save LabelSpace S Ctri s Description Registration complete 78 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS 5 1 3 Applying device settings changed in GX Works2 to MX Component Update the settings with Label Utility after changing the device assignment settings of referred and registered system labels with GX Works2 Operating procedure VXLabelManage Menu M Edit Help H 1 O Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Register the system labeled with the following procedure E 2 To recto osci Saton Number Application gt MX Component gt Label Utility 3 To register System Label Label Utility starts Reference Workspace E Logical Station Number FE Structured Data Types YE System Label List Description The system label notification icon is displayed on the Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Register the system labeled with the following procedure 1 Select the LabelSpace Label 2 To register Logical Station Number 3 To register System Label status bar of Label Utility 2 Select the Label
221. ion Program setting type Select when the program setting type is used to create programs button Start Communication Setting Wizard and set the transfer setting When the modem communication data is set on Communication Setting Wizard the following screen is displayed after the ES button is clicked When the password is set enter the password and click the __ button Please enter the password Please push OK as itis when there is not a password setting ua o _ cama Connect Retry Times Set the number of retries 0 to 9 to be performed when an error occurs during monitoring with PLC Monitor Utility 108 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS Point When the program setting type is selected the details of the transfer setting can be changed by clicking the programmable controller or personal computer sketch Transfer setting Utity eating type Logical station number 1 24 Sample E MutDrop C cout Module type a371c24 CPU type faozrr 110000 ms Transmission speed 18200 bps Station No 5 by clicking the corresponding portion of the screen connect Retry Times 5 ox Cancel Communication Setting Wizard PC side es Please select the PC side UF ce aT Communication setting Connect port COM1 y Time out 10000 ms Cancel Next gt HIBN JOWUOW Dd ZL usaJos Bunjes JajsueJ UO suonelado 1 72 109 7
222. ion command into pulse lt Initialization command into puls sM400 217 Prs M31 Purning Initiali pn alway zation c p ommand i nto puls lt Set the Data for initialization gt M31 M30 2391 TOP HO H34 K2012 K1 Initiali Initiali zation c zation e mmand i nabled hto puls lt Turn on initialization request gt SET Y10 Initiali zation r equest lt Turn on initial request flag SET M39 7 Initial request flag lt Turn on initialize completion gt Y10 x10 2991 H SET M3 Initiali Initiali Initiali gation r zation c zation c quest ompletio ompletio n n flag lt Turn off initialization request gt RST Y10 Initiali zation r equest 338 END 99 agar an Nz gt o 0a 2 9 2 3 2O ge o 33 02 5 ow o 215 3 When Auto line connect Callback number specification maximum of 10 modules is used as callback function Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting Modem connection channel designation 2Ex 1 CH1 GX Developer connection designation 36H 1 Connected Initialization data number designation 34H 2012 No 2012 Callback function designation 2001 Fu Auto line connect Callback number specification maximum of 10 modules Initial processing lt Turn on QJ71C24 accessible X1E X1F o wo QJ71C24 WDT erro QI71C24 ready r accessib le lt Turn on
223. ion wizard has finished collecting a s Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment CC Link_Sample Cancel lt Back Registration complete Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q02 H Station No 5 Multiple CPU None Enter a comment and click the button 173 einpesoid SSSIDY 8 uoHedIUNWWOD YUIT DD 28 4 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the CC Link communication settings using the logical station number set in 3 in this section Operating procedure E Co Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 7 CC Link_Sample x PC UF eC Link CPU type 002 H Board No Not Station No p Multiple CPU None Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 7 CC Link_Sampie p La Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication lt 7 Communication test complete 174 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 7 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 7 Click the Test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an er
224. is count 5 Diagnosis count 0 CPU name Mean time of communication List view Item Description Logical station number Select the logical station number on which a communication test will be performed Communication diagnosis count Set how many times 1 to 32767 the communication test will be repeated for the specified logical station number Test button cancel button Result Start stop the communication test When the logical station number where the modem communication data are set is selected the following screen is displayed after Test button is clicked When the password is set enter the password and click the oK button Please enter the password Please push OK as itis when there is not a password setting Display the result of the communication test Item Description Diagnosis count Display the number of connections during the communication test Display the test result An error code is displayed at error occurrence dis 0 is displayed at normal termination or any value other than 0 is displayed at abnormal termination CPU name Display the connected CPU type Mean time of Display the average time taken until one communication test is established communication Unit ms 92 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 1 4 Importing communication settings Apply the exported communication settings saved to the file Page 94
225. is wizard helps you install software for turn on the programmable controller CPU MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver The screen shown on the left is displayed 2 If your hardware came with an installation CD 8 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do 2 Select Install from a list or specific location O Install the software automatically Recommended install from a istar specie locaton Advanced Advanced and click the button Click Next to continue found New hardware Wizard 3 Select Search for the best driver in these Please choose your search and installation options locations and select Include this location in the Ok search Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search 4 Click the button AN w Browse Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware lt Back Next gt Cancel pis Continued on next page 328 APPENDIX Continued from previous page SNA Browse For Folder 5 Select the USB driver installation destination folder select Easysocket gt USBDrivers and click the
226. isconnect the conversion cable converter to from the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU A Turn ON the conversion cable converter a Turn ON the personal computer gt Start up the software package SWO UONeEdIUNWWOD JO SIIBISQ ZZZ WJO4 uogosuuog yoeg JO asn 104 UONEANBIUO Wajs s zz 39 3 Cables for connection of Q motion CPU For communications between the personal computer and Q motion CPU use the cables as indicated in 1 4 Converter Cable FX CPU compatible for connecting to the USB on personal computer e Applicable devices FX USB AW USB cable included MG S Point Using a USB cable for the first time Install the driver from the CD ROM included with FX USB AW and FX3u USB BD O Considerations and restrictions For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX USB AW refer to the user s manual included 5 USB cable and function expansion board FX3u FX3uc compatible e Applicable devices FX3u USB BD USB cable included i De e ia dE Point Using a USB cable for the first time Install the driver from the CD ROM included with FX USB AW and FX3u USB BD O Considerations and restrictions For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX3u USB BD refer to the user s manual included e When Operate Co
227. ise Operating System English version 3 1 64 bit Windows XP Professional and 64 bit Windows Vista cannot be used 2 The following functions cannot be used If used this product may not operate normally Activating the application with Windows compatible mode e Simplified user switch over e Remote desktop e Large font size Advanced setting of Display Properties DPI setting other than 100 3 The following functions cannot be used e Windows XP Mode e Windows Touch Continued on next page 49 juawuonnuyg Bunelado EZ 50 Item Description Programming language Development software Visual Basic Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual Basic English version Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual Basic English version Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual Basic English version Visual C Programming language 4 Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 Visual C English version Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Visual C English version Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Visual C English version VBScript 5 6 Text editor and commercially available HTML tool VBA Microsoft Excel 2003 English version Microsoft Excel 2007 English version 32 bit Microsoft Excel 2010 English version 1 Microsoft Access 2003 English version Microsoft Access 2007 English version 32 bit Microsoft Access 2010 English v
228. itAppPool Started v20 Integrate Basic Settings mores E Rename X Remove View Applications Hap Online Help Features View Content View Ready G 2 Set True for Enable 32 Bit Applications and click the p button DefaultAppPool Queue Length 1000 Start Automatically cru Limit Limit Action Limit Interval minutes Processor Affinity Enabled Processor Affinity Mask Process Model Identity Idle Time out minutes Load User Profile False Maximum Worker Processes Ping Enabled True Enable 32 Bit Applications enable328itAppOnWin64 If set to true for an application pool on a 64 bit operating system the worker process es serving the application pool will be in WOW64 Windows on Windows64 mode Processes in WOWG4 mo Cancel Setting complete 310 APPENDIX Appendix 2 6 Checking whether Web server can be accessed properly When checking the accessibility via the Internet the personal computer where the Web server is installed must be connected to the Internet After confirming that the Web server is connected to the Internet intranet start the Web browser Internet Explorer on the Web client side personal computer enter the URL as indicated below and check that the Web page is displayed properly URL input example http 192 168 0 1 Mxcomponent NetTest asp i Alias set in Appendix 2 5 IP address of Web server NetTest asp is th
229. ject failed O The OLE server may not be registered To register the OLE server reinstall it o b When the ACT control is pasted and the property is displayed the displayed property name may be collapsed This symptom only occurs on the display of the property and this does not affect the functions of the property c Resizing of ACT control in Access does not affect the operation of MX Component To restore the size set the Height and Width properties of ACT control to 24 Considerations for using VBScript 1 Security of the Internet intranet when using VBScript MX Component does not feature the Internet intranet security function When the security function is required set the setting on the user side INTRODUCTION Thank you for your patronage We appreciate your purchase of the Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT series This manual is designed for users to understand operations of MX Component Before using the product thoroughly read this manual and related manuals to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of MX Component and supported modules to ensure correct use RELATED MANUALS The manuals related to this product are shown below Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals Manual name lt Manual number model code gt Description MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual lt SH 081085ENG 13JW12 gt Explains the programmi
230. k module Operation setting DIP switch Sw Setting Operation mode setting SW1 SW6 SWw1 OFF SW6 OFF 9600bps Inter peripheral transmission speed setting Sw Setting SW2 SW3 sw2 OFF SW3 OFF SW Setting Parity bit setting SW4 SW5 sw OFF SW5 OFF SW7 Test mode setting SW8 OFF OFF online mode 175 BINPOW y9 Jul Jo shuijas YAMS 8 8 UOHEIIUNWWOD PH AUIT OD 8 8 8 8 2 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using CC Link G4 communication Set the operation setting DIP switches of the CC Link G4 module Page 177 2 in this section Connect the CC Link G4 module to the CC Link module Page 177 3 in this section Ww qj Connect the personal computer to the CC Link G4 module Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Ww Set the network parameters Page 178 4 in this section Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard Page 180 5 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Y Page 182 6 in this section Transmission speed 19200bps Transmission speed 10Mbps i
231. king Everyone LOCAL SERVIC 4B PP Security Policies on Local Compute E Change the system time LOCAL SERVICE Admini Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Change the time zone LOCAL SERVICE Admini Create a pagefile Administrators E Create a token object E Create global objects LOCAL SERVICENETWO Create permanent shared objects Create symbolic links Administrators D ograms Adn ors E Deny access to this computer from the network Guest Deny log on as a batch job Deny log on as a service Deny log on locally Guest E Deny log on through Remote Desktop Services Enable computer and user accounts to he trusted for delena 3 Click the Add UserorGou button juno99e ssas9e jauJaju ay Bumnes pz xipuaddy JUSWUOJNIAUY j9Ue 1 u j9uJa u ambiuo 0 MOH Z Xipuaddy Administrators a Continued on next page 305 Continued from previous page 4 Ifthe computer name name of the computer where Ss Internet Information Service is set is not displayed Son Ga peaton in Locations select the computer name After Erterthe object names to select examples confirming the above setting click the Adverces Check Names j button 5 Click the button and select the IUSR ee ban sited account from the Name list box and click the Fom pis locaton ox button Common Queries Col Starts with o ion Sais Disabled accounts S
232. l Item Description Utility setting type Select this to set the transfer setting using the logical station number set on Communication Setup Utility Logical station number Select the logical station number set on Communication Setup Utility When the logical station number where the modem communication data are set is selected the following screen is displayed after the button is clicked When the password is set enter the password and click the __ button Password input OOOO Ea Please enter the password Please push OK as it is when there is not a password setting Connect Retry Times Set the number of retries 0 to 9 to be performed when an error occurs during monitoring with PLC Monitor Utility 107 usajos Bulnes Jessue uo suonelado pzz AMAN JOHUON Dd ZL Point Before specifying the logical station number confirm that the settings of the logical station number the CPU type station number or the like are correct on Communication Setup Utility 2 When selecting the program setting type Screen display Utility setting type Logica stetion numer 1 024 Sample E Program setting type Serial MultiDrop C coma Module type laJ71C24 CPU type Q02 H 10000 ms Transmission speed 19200 bps Station No B Parity Odd Multiple CPU None Control DTR or RTS Connect Retry Times 0 OK Cancel Item Descript
233. l Basic 6 0 Visual Basic NET Visual C 9 6 0 Visual C 9 NET Excel Access 2000 2003 2007 2010 Visual Basic NET Visual C 9 NET Excel Access 2003 2007 2010 Utility setting type ML ACT control e g type ML Program setting type Program setting type ML VBScript Visual Basic 6 0 Visual Basic NET Visual C 6 0 Visual C 9 NET Excel Access 2000 2003 2007 2010 VBScript Visual Basic NET Visual C 9 NET Excel Access 2003 2007 2010 VBScript 2 Communication Setup Utility When importing the setting file ACT file saved in the previous version the values are changed to the one that can be used with the controls of MX Component Version 4 325 juauodulo XW JO UOISJ9A snoad YM SeoUsJEyIG g xIpueddy Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names 1 Reserved word The reserved words cannot be used for label names The following tables shows character strings that cannot be used for label names Category Character string Class identifier VAR VAR_RETAIN VAR_ACCESS VAR_CONSTANT VAR_CONSTANT_RETAIN VAR_INPUT VAR_INPUT_RETAIN VAR_OUTPUT VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN VAR_IN_OUT VAR_IN_EXT VAR_EXTERNAL VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT_RETAIN VAR_EXTERNAL_RETAIN VAR_GLOBAL VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT_RETAIN VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN Data type BOOL BYTE INT SINT DINT LINT UINT USINT UDINT ULINT WORD DW
234. l MX Component Check USB driver installation lt ErrorCode 1808502 Hex gt CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS This chapter explains the system configurations operating environment and usable CPUs of MX Component 2 1 System Configuration List This section lists the systems that can be configured for each operating system 7 1 When using Windows XP Professional Operating System The following table lists the systems that can be configured for the use of Windows XP Professional Item Description Serial communication O Ethernet communication O CPU COM communication O CPU USB communication O MELSECNET H communication o CC Link IE Controller Network communication O Applicable board Applicable driver CC Link IE Controller Network board SW1DNC MNETG B or later CC Link IE Field Network communication O Applicable board CC Link IE Field Network board Applicable driver SW1DNC CCIEF J SW1DNC CCIEF B or later CC Link communication o CC Link G4 communication O Q series bus communication only when PC CPU module is used x GX Simulator communication O GX Simulator2 communication O Modem communication O Gateway function communication O GOT transparent communication O 1 Supported by SWODNC MNETH B Version 70H or later 2 Supported by SW4DNF CCLINK B Version 40E or later O Configurable X Not configura
235. labels e Character string of over 33 characters cannot be used A space cannot be used A numeral cannot be used at the beginning of label name A label name is not case sensitive An underscore _ cannot be used at the beginning or end of label name Consecutive underscores _ cannot be used for a data name or a label name e The digit specified bit devices cannot be used The indexing cannot be used The buffer memory cannot be specified The device check cannot be executed when registering labels 327 SOWEN 9987 JO p sn aq jouueo zey suis JejoeJeyo 6 xipuaddy Appendix 10 UsB Driver Installation In order to communicate with a programmable controller CPU via USB a USB driver is required to be installed The following explains the USB driver installation procedure for Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 Point When more than one MELSOFT product is installed the USB driver is installed in the folder to which the first MELSOFT product is installed This section explains using the USB driver installation destination folder C Program Files MELSOFT Easysocket USBdrivers as an example 1 Windows XP The following explains the procedure of USB driver installation for Windows XP Operating procedure found Mew Hersware Wizard 1 Connect the personal computer and the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard programmable controller CPU with USB cable and Th
236. le controller CPU via modems using Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 or FXCPU Gateway function communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU and third party programmable controllers using the gateway functions of GOT GOT transparent communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using the GOT transparent functions of GOT Utility setting type Abbreviation for user program creation using Communication Setup Utility Program setting type Abbreviation for user program creation without using Communication Setup Utility ACT control A development type for creating user programs using Communication Setup Utility NET control A development type for creating user programs without using Communication Setup Utility Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU Redundant type extension base unit Abbreviation for Q65WRB extension base unit for redundant system Windows XP Windows Vista Generic term for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System and Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Generic term for Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System and Microsoft Window Vista Enterprise Operat
237. leting the Found New driver installation is complete Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for 8 Click the button to close the window e MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver Click Finish to close the wizard Installation complete 329 Point If the USB driver cannot be installed confirm the following settings If Block Never install unsigned driver software is selected under Control Panel System Hardware Driver Signing the USB driver may not be installed Select Ignore Install the software anyway and don t ask for my approval or Warn Prompt me each time to choose an action in Driver Signing and execute the USB driver installation 330 2 Windows Vista APPENDIX The following explains the procedure of USB driver installation for Windows Vista Operating procedure Windows needs to install driver software for your Unknown Device Locate and install driver software recommended Windows will guide you through the process of installing driver software for your device Ask me again later Windows will ask again the next time you plug in your device or log on Don t show this message again for this device Your device will not function until you install driver software e Windows needs your permission to continue If you started this action continue W Device driver software installation p Microsoft Windows Y per
238. lick the n gt button When via GOT is selected on Wizard 2 the following screen is displayed Wizard 3 differs in available setting items depending on the settings on Wizard 2 Set all available setting items and click the button Please select the GOT PLC UF Seat GOT PLC UF Communication setting Connect module Cancel CPU module X lt Back 97 susaJos pez Bunes vonesiunuwuos uo suonejado 9 12 Ann dnjas uopeojunwwoo 98 Continued from previous page W Wizard 4 Please select the Network Station type Other station MELSECNET 10 H fd Mode MELSECNET H l Wizard 5 Please select the Other station Other station setting CPU type The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Cancel lt Back Setting completion Wizard 4 differs in available setting items depending on the settings on Wizard 2 and Wizard 3 Set all available setting items and click the button When the modem is selected on Wizard 2 the Connect Line screen is displayed before Wizard 4 For details of the Connect Line screen refer to the following section lt Page 100 Section 7 1 7 Operations on Connect Line screen Wizard 5 differs in available setting items depending on the settings on Wizard 2 Wizard 3 and Wizard 4 Set a
239. ll available setting items and click the button Comment the logical station number being set The maximum number of characters for comment is 32 Enter a comment and click button If a comment is not required click the rus button without entering it CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS When the registration of the logical station number is completed on Communication Setting Wizard the settings are displayed on the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab lt Before registration gt hy Communication Setup Utility Lo a Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number Wizard lt After registration gt Sy Communication Setup Utility Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 1 Serial PC VF comi Time out 10000 ms CPU type zj MNETH a02 H Transmission speed 3600 bps Control DTR or RTS Sem EMBARCA Delete iit if CPU type a02 NetworkNo 5 Station No 5 Muttiple CPU None 99 susaJ9s PJEZI Bunjes UONESIUNWWOD UO suonesjado 9 vz AIN dnjes uopeojunwwoo pZ 7 1 7 Operations on Connect Line screen This screen is used to set the telephone line settings required to set modem communication in Communication Setup Utility 1 Connect Line screen Set the line connection system telephone line AT command and the like Screen display Con
240. llation retry times Set the AT command password cancellation retry count 1 to 999 times Increase the set count if the AT command cannot be sent or the password cannot be canceled Line callback cancel wait time Call back delay time Set the Line callback cancel wait time 1 to 180 seconds Increase the set time if the line at the other end Q series compatible C24 side is not disconnected within the set time depending on the line connected region example overseas Set the callback delay time 1 to 999 seconds Increase the set time if the device for relaying connection to the line example modem etc requires the set time for reconnection after line disconnection Call back reception waiting time out Set the callback reception waiting time out 1 to 3600 seconds Increase the set time if a time out occurs in a callback receive waiting status 106 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 2 PLC Monitor Utility This section explains how to operate and set PLC Monitor Utility 7 2 1 Operations on Transfer setting screen This screen is used to set connection from the personal computer to the programmable controller CPU Operating procedure O Online gt Transfer setting This screen is also displayed when PLC Monitor Utility is started 1 When selecting the utility setting type Screen display Logical station number ji C24_Sample Program setting type Connect Retry Times 0 Cance
241. ltiple processes forcing one process to be terminated by Task Manager or the like may stop the other processes at the communication function execution area Error at communication start A communication error may occur within the preset time out period at a communication start for example when the communication diagnostic button is pressed when a monitoring is started or when any function is executed These errors are assumed to be detected before a time out error Example When the communication cable is not connected at when the programmable controller power is off CheckDeviceString Do not use the CheckDeviceString method of ACT control ActUMsg control and ActUWzd control Installing MX Component registers the ActUMsg control and the ActUWzd control however do not use them 6 Considerations for using Ethernet modules a Provide an interval longer than the sequence scan time of the Ethernet module mounted station for a period from when the Open method is executed until the Close method is executed b Provide an interval of at least 500ms for a period from when the Close method is executed until the Open method is executed again 7 Considerations for execution of Disconnect If a telephone line cannot be disconnect by executing the Disconnect function for some reason power OFF the modem being used to forcibly disconnect the telephone line Considerations for using Microsoft Excel 1 Considerations for
242. m The valid CPU number specified for a multi CPU system is that of the last accessed station only When accessing the non controlled CPU of the relayed module on the accessed station use the modules of function version B as the relayed modules and QCPUs Q mode on the host station all relayed stations and accessed station 1 Example CPU COM communication When the programmable controller CPU number 3 0x3E2 is specified for access the CPU can be accessed Personal Last access target computer QCPU Q mode No 1 alo a QCPU ld mode No 2 QCPU Q mode No 3 4 QCPU Q mode No 4 2 Example CPU COM communication via MELSECNET H When the programmable controller CPU No 3 0x3E2 network number 2 and station number 2 are specified for access the CPU G can be accessed The CPU number cannot be specified for the relayed station Therefore if the network number 1 is accessed in the following case an error will occur because the network number controlled by the CPU is only 2 Personal Relayed station Last access target a See la e o b E computer y QCPU Q mode No 3 m Jal ol alel O QCPU Q mode No 4 oyes ett VO 010121 E MELSECNET H module controlled by Network number 1 station number 1 ES 2 MELSECNET H module controlled by
243. mally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 145 2Jmpaxold ssedoy Z 1 g uonesiunwwoy elas 18 8 2 Ethernet Communication When Using Ethernet Interface Modules This section provides the procedure for Ethernet communication with the Ethernet interface module and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 2 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using Ethernet communication Set the Ethernet module parameters o Page 147 2 in this section Page 148 3 in this section Connect the Ethernet module and personal computer E Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Edit the HOSTS file Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard Poy 5 Page 149 5 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly Mr co o 5 Page 151 6 in this section Complete 1 The H
244. meter of GX Works2 e Issue a system switching request at disconnection detection e Issue a system switching request at communication error Check the following based on the status of the above special relay and special registers and remove the error cause e Check the Redundant CPU for an error e Check the tracking cable status and whether the tracking cable is correctly connected e Check the relevant network module for an error and the network where the relevant network module is connected for an error 321 Ndo juepunpay YM Ayiquedwog 1 xipueddy 1 Examples of access by path switch The following shows examples of path switch during access to the control system by Ethernet connection lt Fig 1 When system switching occurs at communication error gt Connection to control system MX Component il Ethernet Communication error Control system Standby system al Tracking cable gt Connection to control system MX Component Control system Standby system Tracking cable lt Fig 2 When standby system error occurs gt Connection to control system MX Component Il E Standby system Ethernet Control system Standby gt system fault gH Tracking cable Cen Connection to control system MX C
245. mination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 193 ainpesoid ssa00V 11 8 UOHESIUNWWOD H LANOASTAW 118 8 1 2 CC Link IE Controller Network Communication This section provides the CC Link IE Controller Network communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 12 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using CC Link IE Controller Network communication Set the CC Link IE Controller Network board Connect the personal computer to the CC Link IE Controller Network Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Page 195 2 in this section Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard Page 196 3 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly ES Page 198 4 in this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Normal station Sta No 2 Personal computer MX Component First CC Link IE Controller Network bo
246. mmands 2 Click the nwa commans button The AT command registration screen is displayed Group name Modem at MELSOFT application side Title Corporation Type Modem AT command AT amp C1Q0V1 N3 amp D2 amp K3 Cancel Help of AT command 104 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 3 Set the items on the screen Item Description Group name Display the group name of data to which AT command is registered Title Enter a title for the AT command to be registered AT command Set the command for modem initialization The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in ASCII code 4 Clickthe button gt The AT command is registered Screen button Item Description Edit button Edit the registered data Select the registered data to be edited on the list of registered AT commands The AT command registration screen is displayed by clicking the Edit button Edit the data Copy button Copy a registered AT command to another group Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered AT commands The Group screen is displayed by clicking the Copy button Select the group to which data is pasted and click the button Move group button Move a registered AT command to another group Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered AT commands The Group screen is displayed by clicking
247. mmunication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for CPU USB communication 1 0 5 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for CPU USB communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU Access Target Device Device Name QCPU A meda Q12DCCPU V LCPU QscPu FXCPU Function input FX O x O x x Function output FY Q x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O O x Special register SD O O O O x Input relay X O O O O o Output relay Y O O O O o Internal relay M O O O O o Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O O x Edge relay V O x O O x Link relay B O x O O x Data register D O O O O o Link register W O x O O x Contact TS O x O O o ae Coil TC O x O O 0 Present value TN O x O O o Contact TS O x O O o sol Coil TC O x O O 07 Present value TN O x O O o Retentive Contact TS Q x O O x timer Coil TC O x O O x ST Present value TN O x O O x Link special relay SB O x O O x Link special register SW O x O O x Step relay S x x x x o Direct input DX x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 Accessible to FX3GCPU only Continued on next page 250 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES
248. mmunication Setting is selected on the lt lt PLC System 2 gt gt tab of PLC parameter the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU Write the setting in which Operate Communication Setting is cleared from the built in programming port of the programmable controller CPU When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3u FX3uc the channel setting CH1 CH2 combo box is displayed Select CH1 to confirm the setting PA Es Memory Capacity PLC Name PLCSrstem 1 PLCSistem 2 Postoning The setting contents are deared when unchecked When communicate with Gx Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc the D8120 special register of PLC must be 0 deared and must be unchecked r zl z Print Window Print Window Preview Default Check End Cancel 40 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 6 RS 422 function expansion board for FXCPU Series Function expansion board FX3u FX3uc FX3u 422 BD FX3c FX3c 422 BD FX2n FXe2n 422 BD FXis FXin FXin 422 BD Point O PLC parameter When Operate Communication Setting is selected on the lt lt PLC System 2 gt gt tab of PLC parameter the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU Write the setting in which Operate Communication Setting is cleared from the built in programming port of the programmable controller
249. munication refer to the manual of each network board 44 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 7 CC Link IE Field Network communication XP Vista W7 32 bit O O O W7 64 bit x O Considerations 1 Use the communication driver SW1DNC CCIEF J SW1DNC CCIEF B or later The other communication drivers cannot be used 2 For details of the supported operating system of the network board to be used for communication refer to the manual of each network board 8 CC Link communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O x O Considerations 1 Use the communication driver SW1DNC CCBD2 B or later Use the one whose version is 1 04E or later for Windows Vista and version 1 08J or later for Windows 7 The other communication drivers cannot be used 2 For details of the supported operating system of the network board to be used for communication refer to the manual of each network board 3 The CC Link master station module used should be of software version N or later O Applicable CPU modules QCPU Q mode LCPU 9 CC Link G4 communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O O O Considerations 1 The CC Link G4 module used should be of software version D or later 2 The CC Link master station module used should be of software version N or later O Switch settings of the CC Link G4 module For the switch settings for the use of MX Com
250. n MELSECNET H communication CC Link IE Controller Network communication CC Link IE Field Network communication CC Link communication CC Link G4 communication Q series bus communication only when PC CPU module is used GX Simulator communication GX Simulator2 communication Modem communication O O JO O xX OJOJOJOJOJO O O Gateway function communication O GOT transparent communication O Configurable x Not configurable si7 uoleunByuoD weajs s pZ wa s s Bunyelado LISIA SMOPUIM Buisn u yM ELZ 31 2 1 4 When using Windows 7 Operating System The following table lists the systems that can be configured for the use of Windows 7 Description Item 32 bit edition 64 bit edition O O Serial communication Ethernet communication CPU COM communication CPU USB communication MELSECNET H communication CC Link IE Controller Network communication CC Link IE Field Network communication CC Link communication CC Link G4 communication Q series bus communication only when PC CPU module is used GX Simulator communication GX Simulator2 communication Modem communication O O O O xX OJOJOJO O O OJO O OJO O x O x x x x O OJO Gateway function communication GOT transparent communication O O O Configurable x Not configurable 32 2 2 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS System Co
251. n complete 168 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the CPU USB communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure lt a So Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number fe CPU USB_Sample Pa Wizard Delete USB HTT MNET H mi a ES a a PC UF usa CPU type Q02 H CPU type 002 H Time out 110000 ms Network No 1 Station No B Multiple CPU None Exit Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 6 CPU USB_Sample p Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count o Result CPU name Mean time of communication Click a Communication test complete Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 6 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 6 Click the Tet button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the foll
252. nce Workspace on the Navigation window and select Workspace gt Dereference Registration Ann leqe7 eZ sasedsy10m Bulesueo Bulla siBal pue Bunlajay G E 129 7 3 6 Change notification 1 Change notification When Workspace is referred and registered the system label notification icon is displayed by executing the change confirmation when the status changed labels exist Operating procedure O Menu gt System Label gt Check Changes of System Label Database The change confirmation is also executed when Label Utility starts Screen display E CAP NUM SCRL Change notification is received Point For using the change notification function use MELSOFT Navigator version 1 39R or later Receive a change notification when executing any of the following operations on the reference Workspace The change notification is not sent when creating a new system label Change in system labels including the change of comment and remark e Deletion of system labels 2 Applying the changed data Apply the status changed label information when Workspace is referred and registered When more than one Workspace is referred apply them for each LabelSpace Operating procedure e Menu gt System Label gt Change Contents of System Label Database e Right click the system label notification icon M6 and select Change Contents of System Label Database 130 CHAPTER 7 UTI
253. nches the Update Driver Software Wizard for the selected device 7 Continued on next page 341 Jeauq gsn Bunepdn xipueddy Continued from previous page How do you want to search for driver software gt Search automatically for updated driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location CAMELSEC EasysocketiEasysockerGOT Drivers Y Browse V Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device Y Update Driver Software MITSUBISHI Easy Windows has successfully updated your driver software Windows has finished installing the driver software for this device MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver gt Complete 342 3 Select Browse my computer for driver software 4 Specify Easysocket USBdrivers and click the Net button The left screen is an example when C MELSEC Easysocket USBarivers is set If more than one MELSOFT product is installed browse the installation destination of the first product 5 Click the cose button APPENDIX Appendix 12 Warning Messages on Window
254. nd Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 259 seBue eqissad9y z 0L uoHeoUNWWOD Y9 AUN ID 104 2 0 10 8 For MELSECNET H Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for MELSECNET H communication 1 0 8 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for MELSECNET H communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU or own board Access Target Device Device Name QCPU e Own Q12DCCPU V LCPU QascpPu FXCPU Q mode board Function input FX O x Function output FY Function register FD Special relay SM Special register SD Input relay X Output relay Y Internal relay M Latch relay L Annunciator F Edge relay V Link relay B Data register D Link register W Contact TS Timer Coil TC T Present value TN Contact TS Counter Coil TC C Present value TN Retentive Contact TS timer Coil TC ST Present value TN Link special relay SB Link special register SW Step relay S Direct input DX Direct output DY x x xix O O O O O Of O CO OF OF OF CO CO CO Of OF OF OF OF CO
255. nect way Ja UA Sed Line Line type TONE vY Outside line number Port COM1 y Connection Call number Browse Name AT command Modem standard Help of AT command AT command setting Brov Titl Details setting Cancel lt Back E Item Description Reference Set the line connection system When Q series compatible C24 is used any of the following items can be selected Fixed to Auto line connect when FXCPU is used Item Description Select this when the callback function is not Auto line connect set Auto line connect Callback fixation Connect way Auto line connect Callback number 7 specification For details on the connection format of each Callback connect Fixation callback function refer to the following rE manual Callback connect Number specification LA MX Component Version 4 Programming Callback request Fixation Manual Callback request Number specification Callback reception waiting Callback number Set the telephone number used with the callback function of Q series compatible C24 This item can be set only when Auto line connect Callback number specification Callback connect Number specification or Callback connect Number specification is selected in the line connection system 100 Continued on next page CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS Item Description Reference Line Line type Select a line type Tone Puls
256. net Explorer 5 0 or later HTML for programmable controller monitoring Y CAMELSEC Act Samplee VBScrips SampleHTML Sample html Windows Internet Explorer oa E t sen 6 x 8 sg p mi Bd DASE e 2 Using ASP function for monitoring via Internet intranet Using the ASP function of VBScript and releasing the Web pages on the factory side side which monitors data using MX Component enables the programmable controller device status or remote operation for an error to be performed from a remote location or during business trip via the Internet intranet by merely specifying the factory side URL on Internet Explorer lt Factory side gt MX Component Programmable controller accessing ASP Web server 1 1 Web server supported by operating system Internet Information Server Personal Web Server etc lt Office side gt Web browser 2 Internet Explorer 5 0 or later ME Corp Pei ae 0e 26 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW b VBA driven data collection and monitoring function Programming using VBA allows Excel or Access functions to be utilized to create an application for providing a
257. new reference The canceled references are not restored The label information within the LabelSpace cannot be edited after the reference registration Note that the logical station numbers can be registered Operating procedure e Select the LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window and O Menu gt Workspace gt Reference Registration e Right click Reference Workspace on the Navigation window and select Workspace gt Reference Registration Screen display E Save Folder Path F C MELSOFT Navigator Browse B Workspace List L Workspace 3 WS001 Workspace Name W 500 1 Description of Icons ag Workspace Item Description Save Folder Path Click the Browse button and select a folder in the Browse for Folder screen Workspace List Display the list of Workspaces Point The structure array labels whose devices are automatically assigned or whose devices are bit specified cannot be referred and registered properly Register them with the system label list 128 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 2 Canceling Cancel the reference of registered Workspace for importing the system label The label information within the LabelSpace can be edited after canceling the reference registration Operating procedure e Select the LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window Menu gt Workspace gt Dereference Registration e Right click Refere
258. next page 344 Continued from previous page 2 gt Control Panel User Accounts User Accounts Change your account picture Add or remove user accounts Change your Windows password Windows CardSpace Manage Information Cards that are used to log on to online services 4 Make changes to your user account Change your password Remove your password Change your picture 0 Change your account name Change your account type Manage another account Turn User Account Control on or off Y A 8 User Accounts Tum User Account Control On or Off y Search P Tum on User Account Control UAC to make your computer more secure User Account Control UAC can help prevent unauthorized changes to your computer We recommend that you leave UAC turned on to help protect your computer Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer Coe canal aos Setting complete APPENDIX Select User Accounts Select Turn User Account Control on or off Clear Use User Account Control UAC to help protect your computer and click the C _ button 345 SMOpulj UO sabessajy Bululem Z xipueddy soBessow Bulusem Bulqesip 10 SPOYISIN ZZ XIpuaddy b When using Windows 7 b g Operating procedure A Getting Started E Connect to a Projector Calculator SES Windows Fax and Scan La Remote Desktop Connection e7 Magnif
259. nfiguration for Use of Each Connection Form This section provides the system configurations for the use of MX Component on a communication form basis For details and considerations on each communication form refer to the following section 5 Page 35 Section 2 2 2 Details of communication forms 2 2 1 System configurations Personal computer dE Serial communication Ethernet communication CPU COM communication CPU USB communication MELSECNET H communication CC Link IE Controller Network communication CC Link IE Field Network communication CC Link communication CC Link G4 communication RS 232 RS 232 RS 485 conversion TTT Too Ethernet ool Ethernet board CC Link IE Field Network CC Link IE Field Ethemet adapter module Network RS 232 RS 232 RS 422 conversion Converter cable USB CoCo Too Poof MELSECNET H board CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network CoCo Ooo ool CC Link IE Controller Network board UUUU TOUT een i CC Link IE Field Network board UUUU UDUL aa JU CC Link board RS 232 RS 422 conversion CC Link G4 module Software version D or later I CT Gar DP EP El E E Ul o Lo I Serial communication module FX extended port FX 485 BD FX
260. ng system to compatible updating the USB drivers is also required The USB driver has the following two types USB driver for programmable controller connection USB driver for GOT connection Used for the GOT transparent mode 1 Procedure for updating the USB driver for programmable controller connection a Checking method Whether an update of the USB driver is required or not can be checked by its version Start the Windows Device Manager while the personal computer is connected to the programmable controller with USB right click MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver and select Properties Update is required if the version shown on the lt lt Driver gt gt tab of the properties screen is the following e Windows Vista 2 0 0 0 or earlier e Windows 7 3 0 0 0 or earlier MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver Properties General Diver Details MITSUBISHI Easysocket Driver Driver Provider MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CO Driver Date 2 15 2010 Driver Version 3 0 0 0 Digtal Signer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Driver Details To view details about the driver files _ Update Driver To update the driver software for this device Ifthe device fails after updating the driver roll back to the previously installed driver Disable Disables the selected device To uninstall the driver Advanced Uninstall OK Cancel b Procedure for update 1 Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CP
261. ng MX Component log on as a user with the administrator authority For the required personal computer operating environment to install MX Component refer to the following section 5 Page 49 Section 2 3 Operating Environment 1 Installing the product Operating procedure ao 1 Right click Start and select Explorer Sharewith v ee ee ee Click the drive in which the disk is inserted and P Soiree GQ Sinan double click SETUP EXE 2 a ie When user account control is enabled the following a ae screen is displayed aoe shied Click the button or Allow as lt Windows 7 gt lt Windows Vista gt TN TEE E iano CD DVD drive gt Cancel Y Show details EJ Live aea don t know where this program is from or what it s for gt Allow I trust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer Continued on next page 52 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION Continued from previous page 2 Ifthe message on the left is displayed click the button to uninstall MX Component and then reinstall it This package has already been installed There is a possibility for improper installation if you execute without uninstalling it a 3 Ifthe message on the left is displayed install F This package is not in proper operating environme
262. ng Wizard 3 Communication path Display such information as the network type network number start I O address and station information number 4 Logical station Display the logical station number set for the utility setting type number This number is not displayed when the program setting type is used Point Specifying the device memory in the U G format enables the buffer memory to be monitored O When monitoring the setting values of the timers and counters indirectly specify the data registers Devices cannot be monitored if the connection destination is not established The transfer settings cannot be set during monitoring AWN JOHUON Dd ZL qe y9Jeg s9meg uo suonelado ZZZ 111 7 2 3 Operations on Buffer Memory tab This tab is used to monitor the specified buffer memory Screen display RI PLC Monitor Utility oa Menu Online Help Device Batch f Butter Memory Entry Device a Device FEDC BA9 84765443210 Module VO HEX Memory address HEX y Start monitor Monitor format Bit amp Word Display 16bit integer Data format DEC Bit order FO k tlld Le Q02 H 2 3 4 Item Description Module 1 0 Enter the start address of the module to be monitored For access to FXCPU enter the block number of the special expansion device into Module I O
263. ng procedures detailed explanations and error codes of the ACT controls Type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link System Master Local Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC CCBD2 B lt SH 080527ENG 13JR77 gt Explains the system configuration specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting of the type Q80BD J61BT11N Q81BD J61BT11 CC Link system master local interface board MELSECNETHH Interface Board User s Manual For SWODNC MNETH B lt SH 080128 13JR24 gt CC Link IE Controller Network Interface Board User s Manual For SW1DNC MNETG B lt SH 080691ENG 13JZ02 gt Explains the system configuration specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting of the MELSEC H board Explains the system configuration specifications functions handling wiring and troubleshooting of the CC Link IE Controller Network board GX Simulator Version 7 Operating Manual lt SH 080468ENG 13JU51 gt Explains the setting and operating method for monitoring the device memory and simulating the machine side operations using GX Simulator GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt Explains the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to a Simple project and Structured project such as parameter setting operation method for the online function MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual is included on the CD ROM of the software package in a P
264. ninstall completed Some elements could not be removed You should manually remove items related to the application Details gt Uninstallation complete When the screen on the left is displayed uninstall is complete Click the button to close the screen CHAPTER 4 OPERATION PROCEDURES CHAPTER 4 OPERATION PROCEDURES This chapter explains the selection of the MX Component utilities development type and the procedures for creating user applications 4 1 Utilities The following are the utilities used in MX Component Item Description Reference Communication Setup ce Des f Page 89 K Set the parameter for communication with the wizard Utility Section 7 1 y Set the transfer settings using the logical station number set with Page 107 PLC Monitor Utility ae A f Communication Setup Utility and monitor the programmable controller Section 7 2 ai ae Page 119 Label Utility Register utilize the system labels Section 7 3 61 SOMin Lp 4 2 Selecting Development Type When using MX Component to create user applications select the utility setting type or program setting type before creating a user application The following explains utility setting type and program setting type 1 2 3 Utility setting type Set the communication settings using Communication Setting Wizard With Communication Setup Utility a user program can be created without be
265. nk O O O x O x TI 2 3 4 5 Relayed stations cannot be accessed through QSCPU Q motion CPU Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and QSCPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported Accessible when the MELSECNET H module of the connected station is in the MELSECNET H mode The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 1 0 9 For CC Link IE Controller Network Communication This section provides the accessible devices and accessible ranges for CC Link IE Controller Network communication 1 0 9 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for CC Link IE Controller Network communication 1 When access target is programmable controller CPU or own board Access Target Device Device Name QCPU r Own Q12DCCPU V LCPU QscPuU FXCPU Q mode board Function input FX O x Function output FY Function register FD Special relay SM Special register SD Input relay X Output relay Y Internal relay M Latch relay L Annunciator F Edge relay V Link relay B S Data register D a gt Link register W 3 Contact TS o Timer Coil
266. nnect communication path on MX Component 1 Device data of QSCPU cannot be changed 6 Access to buffer memory of special function module Not only the devices of the programmable controller CPU but also the buffer memory of an intelligent function or special function module can be accessed or special function module can be read written Ui E MX Component e Access to buffer memory l o ES memory data of connected intelligent J 1 1 Buffer memory data of QSCPU cannot be written CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 7 Read write of programmable controller CPU time data The time data of the programmable controller CPU connected to the personal computer can be read written a Time data of connected programmable controller CPU can be read written o V E MX E ES Component I Il cS Access to time data _ l k Ea 1 Time data of QSCPU cannot be written 8 Multi thread communication The same communication path can be accessed from multiple threads at the same time User program 9 GX Simulator or the simulator function of GX Works2 GX Simulator2 for offline debugging
267. nt EnvMEL Page 56 2 in this section Y Please install this package after executing EnvMEL Setup Exe from os After the operation is complete restart installation operation 4 Check that all applications is closed and click the There is a possibility for improper installation A if you execute without closing all the running applications Including resident programs Ok button If the applications are running close all running applications Cancel 5 Starting setup Enter the name and company name and click the button Type your name below You must also type the name of the company you work for Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co uoHel e SuU p e lt Back Cancel 6 Check the registered name and company name Check if the registered content is correct and click the button In order to change the information click the __ wo button to return to the previous screen You have provided the following registration information Name Mitsubishi Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co Is this registration information correct Yes No aE Continued on next page 53 54 Continued from previous page E Please enter the product ID of the product Please input in single byte English characters S m lt Back Cancel The setup will install SWnDN ACT in the following directory Click Next to install in this dire
268. nt CPU 2 Cannot perform communication if a remote password is set to the connected station side Q series compatible E71 3 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 4 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 288 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 9 Personal computer side port Serial GOT1000 side port Serial CPU side port Ethernet port a Configuration Connected Relayed station CPU module Ethernet gt Relayed network or Relayed station Relayed CPU module Serial _ EA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible EMI Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion E LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode 2 CPU V CPU CC IE Control 3 4 x x x CC IE Field a O O MELSECNET H O O x x x x QnUDE H CPU z aa Ethernet os x x x x x oF o 0 Serial communication O x O x x x N gt 23 CC Link O O O x x x 8 Q CC IE Control A O 3 4 x x x 2 CC IE Field E O z7 a 3 MELSE
269. nt for MX Component Item Description Personal computer PC AT compatible machine supporting the following operating systems CPU Required memory Refer to the table Operating systems and hardware requirements below PC CPU module MELSEC Q series compatible PC CPU module CONTEC CO LTD product Available hard disk capacity 1GB or more Virtual memory available capacity is 512MB or more Display Resolution 1024 x 768 dots or more Operating system e Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version SP3 or later Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version SP3 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version SP2 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version SP2 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version SP2 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System English version SP2 or later Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version SP2 or later Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System English version 3 Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System English version P Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System English version K Microsoft Windows 7 Enterpr
270. nufacturer the modem is generically referred to as the cellular phone communication unit in this manual Select the model of the cellular phone communication unit according to the cellular phone used For details contact the company of your cellular phone b Cellular phone without auto answer function For the cellular phone without auto answer function use a cellular phone communication unit that features the ANS ORG TEL select switch If the cellular phone communication unit does not have the ANS ORG TEL select switch the line cannot be connected The line connection procedure is different according to the cellular phone company and cellular phone model For details contact the manufacturer of your cellular phone Considerations of programming 1 Sample programs test programs and sample sequence programs a Sample programs and test programs Sample programs are included for references when creating user programs Test programs are included for conducting communication tests Use the programs with your responsibility b Sample sequence programs 2 3 4 5 Sample sequence programs included in MX Component require modifications according to the system configuration and parameter settings Modify the program to suit the system Use the programs with your responsibility Forced termination of processes during communication If communication is performed with the same type of control open for mu
271. o b11 to b1 bO o OFF SD1590 requesting path requesting path sD1590 0 ol onjo f P s gt Module No 0 Invalid as CPU module switch in host switch in host uses 2 slots system system Module No 1 Indicates the module to to the right of CPU module Module No 11 Indicates the module at the right end of a 12 1 0 slot base Q312B Refer to SD1690 for module number for network module requesting path switch in other system Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to module number for network module requesting path switch in other systems Turns off by the system after recovery from error of the relevant module by user Module number for Module number for Bit status network module network module b15to b11 to b1 b0 o OFF SD1690 requesting path requesting path D1690 _0 p oo f switch in other system switch in other system E Module No 0 Invalid as CPU module uses 2 slots Module No 1 Indicates the module to to the right of CPU module Module No 11 Indicates the module at the right end of a 12 1 0 slot base Q312B Refer to SD1590 for module number for network module requesting path switch in host system 323 Ndo juepunpay yum Ayiquedwog 1 xipueddy 4 Combination table Communications via redundant type extension base unit Q65WRB are supported The following table shows the supported unsupported combinations C
272. o change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number 6 z cme fa _ Please select the PC side VF PC side UF USB Y Communication setting Time out 10000 ms Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF CPU module Communication setting CPU type a02 Y cmos c co Continued on next page Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button Enter 6 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F USB Time out 10000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F CPU module CPU type Q02 H 167 eunpesoid ssad0y 9 8 uOnesIunuuo9 GSN Ndd 98 Continued from previous page 507 5 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the Network Station type Other station X button Network Juecsccnemos Station type Other station Network MELSECNET 10 H Mode MELSECNET H 6 Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q02 H Network No zd Station No 8 Multiple CPU None 7 Enter a comment and click the button The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment CPU USB_Sample Registratio
273. o register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace LabelSpace Add LabelSpace N window and select Rename LabelSpace en 1 Page 119 Section 7 3 1 Reference Workspace Change the LabelSpace name F Logical Station Number KE Structured Data Types RE System Label List Description sjeqe7 wuajs s Buisn G MXLabelManage Menu M Edit Help H 3 Right click System Label List on the Navigation If you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace LabelSpace Label window and select System Label List gt New lt Page 122 Section 7 3 3 Reference Workspace Set the system label list name E Logical Station Number F Structured Data Types is SS juauodulo XW ul sjeqe Wayshs JajsiBay L G System Label LtV P New Rl Description cap NUM SCRL als Continued on next page 69 Continued from previous page Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Delete System Label Name Data Type Device Label ETA Start lamp Bit S 4 Reference Workspace E Logical Station Number F Structured Data Types E System Label List 98 Labell Description y r CAP NUM SCRL Menu M Edit E Help H 5 LabelSpace Label Reference Workspace Set the communication settings and associated LabelSpace HE
274. of Communication Setting Wizard refer to the following section 5 Page 95 Section 7 1 6 Operations on Communication Setting Wizard screens This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number z Cance Ey Communication Setup Utility eee 2 Click the lt lt List View gt gt tab EEREN For details of the lt lt List View gt gt tab refer to the Target setting List view Connection test Logical No Comment PC side VF Wizard following section 1 C24_Sample com1 R F E71_Sample Ethernet Delete gt Page 91 Section 7 1 2 Operations on List view tab 3 QnUDE_Sample Ethernet 4 Ethernet adapter_Sample Ethernet 5 CPU COM_Sample COM1 6 CPU USB_Sample USB 7 CC Link_Sample CC Link 8 CC Link G4_Sample com 9 GX Simulator_Sample GX Simulator 10 GX Simulator2_Sample GX Simulator2 11 MNETH_Sample MNET H 12 CC E Control_Sample CC E Control 13 CC E Field_Sample CC E Field 14 Q Bus_Sample Q Series Bus 15 Modem_Sample com Display 16 GOT_Sample Ethernet Utiity 17 GOT Transparent_Sample USB via GOT 7 Savetext Continued on next page 233 Continued from previous page ys z 3 Select Program from Display Display j pon Utility Click gt
275. ograms gt MELSOFT Application gt MX Component gt Communication Setup Utility Communication Setup Utility starts Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Wizard Delete COM setup import COM setup export N Wizard CPU type aoos Module type jas7ic24 Station No 1 Transmission speed 19200 bps Parity oda Control PTR or RTS Exit 2 TO Menu gt COM setup export lt Page 94 Section 7 1 5 3 Enter the file name to be saved Save As CO di Win7 ENG C MELSEC Act Uti 3 Search Utl Organize New folder FE e Fe Favorites 1 pp Date modified Type E Desktop D Downloads F Recent Places 3 Libraries 3 E Documents a Music Pictures BB Videos pl Computer File name Save as type ACT Regist File act Hide Folders Cancel sjeqe7 wuajs s Buisn G 4 UD Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Application gt MX Component gt Label Utility gt Label Utility starts LabelSpace Undefined Name Reference Workspace BE System Label List Jajndwoo jeuosied Jayjoue uo sjeqe7 wajs s Buisn y L G Description CAP NUM SCRL Continued on next page 81 82 Menu M Edit Help t Logical Station Number S Workspace Import System Label Exito Als Description i r Continued from previous page
276. ol function a When using Windows Vista Operating procedure 1 Start gt Control Panel Internet Internet Explorer Email LEL Windows Mail Documents a Welcome Center Pictures Ma Backup Status and Configuration Music a Windows Media Player Search Small Business Resources Recent Items SES Windows Fax and Scan n Computer 3 Windows Meeting Space rae la Windows Photo Gallery Connect To B Windows Live Messenger Download Control Panel Y Paint Default Programs gt All Programs Help and Support oo S7 2 Select User Accounts CESS E Control Panel Control Panel Home System and Maintenance User Accounts Get started with Windows Add or remove user accounts Back up your computer i Appearance and Security La ee Fer Check for updates ersonalization Change desktop background Check this computer s security status Customize colors 8 Slow program through Windows Firewall Adjust screen resolution _ Network and Internet 3d Clock Language and Region T ta iaa Change keyboards or other input View network status and tasks nee Set up filesharing ane Ease of Access sch cid Sdin Let Windows suggest settings Play CDs or other media automatically Deine den Printer Mouse Ja Additional Options Programs Uninstall a program Change startup programs Mobile PC Change battery settings Adjust commonly used mobility settings Continued on
277. ombination E nctiom E _ _ Product name Model tee When mounted to When mounted to the main base the extension base QJ71LP21 25 D or later O x QJ71LP21S 25 D or later O x QJ71LP21G D or later O x QJ71BR11 D or later O x MELSECNET H module QJ72LP25 25 x x x QJ72LP25G x x x QJ72BR15 x x x QJ71LP21 x x x QJ71E71 x x x QJ71E71 N1 B2 D or later O O Ethernet module QJ71E71 N1 B5 D or later O O QJ71E71 100 D or later O O QJ71C24N x x O Serial communication module QJ71C24N R2 x x O QJ71C24N R4 x x O QJ61BT11 x x O CC Link module x QJ61BT11N x O 1 O CC Link IE Controller Network QJ71GP21 SX D or later O x module QJ71GP21S SX D or later O x O Can be used Xx Cannot be used 1 Cannot be used when the first five digits of the serial number is 06051 or lower 324 APPENDIX Appendix 8 Differences with previous version of MX Component This section explains the differences between MX Component Version 3 and Version 4 1 Engineering environment The following are the changes from MX Component Version 3 The names of ACT control are changed A control that supports all communication paths of program setting type is added Act ML ProgType NET controls with which the labels can be used are added DotUtIType DotSupportMsg Type of control Engineering environment where controls are used Control of Version 3 Control of Version 4 Utility setting type Visua
278. omponent l Es Ethernet Control system Standby system Tracking cable 322 Point APPENDIX Path switch is not executed if a communication error occurs at a communication start for the Redundant CPU specified as the target A communication error occurs O In the case of Ethernet connection it may take time from when a communication error occurs until communication starts after connection to the control system O ifa communication error occurs refer to the following appendix and remove the communication disturbance KL Page 321 3 b in this section How to check for path switch occurrence and examples of access by path switch The following indicates details of the special relay and special registers to be monitored when estimating whether path switch occurred or not Number Name Meaning Explanation e Turn on when an error occurs during redundant system error Other system error OFF No error 9 f y SM1600 check Turn on when either of bits for SD1600 is ON flag ON Error Remain off when no errors are present Any of the following bits turns on corresponding to module number for network module requesting path switch in host system e Turn off by the system after recovery from error of the relevant module by user Module number for Module number for Bit status network module network module b15t
279. omputer is displayed Gateway function communication An error occurs APRN JOHUON Dd ZL usalos Bulljes eu UO suonelado 9 72 117 7 2 7 Operations on telephone line connection disconnection screens Connect and disconnect the telephone line for modem communication 1 Telephone line connection Operating procedure 1 Online gt Connect 2 For telephone line connection the following dialog box is displayed Enter the password and click the __ button poor Please enter the password Please push OK as itis when there is not a password setting Connect cannot be selected when QSCPU is connected 2 Telephone line disconnection O Online gt Disconnect Disconnect cannot be selected when QSCPU is connected 118 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 3 Label Utility This section explains how to operate and set Label Utility 7 3 1 Operations on Label screen Screen display HEY MXLabelManager __Menu M _Edit E _Help H LabelSpace LabelSpace window tre BLine Work window Reference Workspace HBB Logical Station Number MI 1024 Sample 2 71_ Sample 3 QnUDEH Sample A i GS Structured Data Types Navigation window EE STRUOTI ES STRUCTI_1 B f System Label List 9 Label list Sa list Description h the next LabelSpace there is a change in the system label database After selecting th Task window
280. on XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O O O Considerations 1 When performing modem communication set the setting in the parameters and sequence program for the connected module Use any of the following GX Developers to set the corresponding module Module GX Developer FXCPU Version 3 SW3D5C GPPW E SW3D5F GPPW E or later Q series compatible C24 Version 4 SW4D5C GPPW E or later 2 For modem communication using the FXCPU only the FX1s FXin FXinc FX2n FX2nc FX3c FX3u and FXs3uc are applicable 3 Use the RS 232 cable supplied with the modem for connection between the personal computer and modem O Modem specifications When performing modem communication select the modem that satisfies the following specifications AT commands are supported Initialization command DR terminal can be turned ON High independently Example A modem whose CD terminal turns ON as the DR terminal turns ON cannot be used e Communication standard ITU T V 90 V 34 V 32bis V 32 V 22bis V 22 V 21 V FC Bell 212A 103 Point MX Component is not compatible with manual line connection connection via an operator Use a subscriber telephone line or private telephone line to perform modem communication O It is required to set the COM port when performing modem communication by using modem built in the personal computer or the PC card PCMCIA For the COM port of the modem built in the personal comp
281. on 2001 Ox Auto line connect 1H Callback connect Fixation 3H Callback connect Number specification 7H Callback connect Number specification maximum of 10 modules 9H Auto line connect Callback fixation Bu Auto line connect Callback number specification Fu Auto line connect Callback number specification maximum of 10 modules cd EE The following initialization data are factory registered to Q series compatible C24 When the modem used corresponds to the initialization data 7DO0H to 7DAn specify the following registration number When using the modem where the initialization data is not registered register the AT command to the buffer memory address 1B00u of Q series compatible C24 gt Nz Registration Number Corresponding Device a 2 Initialization Command 8 2 Hexadecimal Decimal Manufacturer Model A o komme PV AF2881WW 3 7D0 2000 ATQOV1E1X1 JO Q2 V2 N3S0 1 Ai 3 3 il Q Q wa PV BF288M2 ae 2 5 MC288XE s5 7D14 2001 ATQOV1E1X1 Q2 V2 N3S0 1 Micro General Laboratory 38 MC288X1 S 5 k DESKPORTE22 8S 7D2h 2002 ATQOV1E1X1 amp K3 N3S0 1 Microcom DESKPORTE33 68 7D3h 2003 ATQOV1E1X1 amp H1 amp R2 amp A3 amp D2S0 1 Omron ME3314B 7D4n 2004 ATQOV1E1X1 J0 Q2 N3S0 1 Sun Electronic MS336AF 7D5n 2005 ATE1Q0V18C18D28H18108R28 50S0 1 Omron ME5614B Sun Electronic MS56KAF 7D6n 2006 ATE1Q0V1 amp C1 amp D2 amp K3 amp S0S0 1 Micro General Laboratory MRV56XL
282. on Setting Wizard Y On the communication test screen check whether a communication can be performed properly A Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Ma Page 203 4 in this section 9 INp3201d SSIDIY L El 8 UOHEIUNWWOD YMN PI 31 AUN 9O l 8 Master station Sta No 0 Personal computer MX Component First CC Link IE Field Network board is used Numeral within O indicates station number Q13UDHCPU at local station station number 1 Network No 1 on network number 1 is accessed Logical station number of 13 is used 199 2 Checking the CC Link IE Field Network board Check whether the personal computer is connected properly to CC Link IE Field Network Operating procedure Lo Start gt All Programs gt MELSEC gt CC IE Field Board gt CC IE Control Utility la Edit View Online Diagnostics Window Help 2 O Project gt New 3 Set the following items and click the button Network type CC IE Field Master station Channel No 181 Network No 1 Total Stations 1 Mode Online Normal Mode patatas a El 4 D Online gt Write to Board Write the parameter settings of the project to the CC Link IE Field Network board Continued on next page 200 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXA
283. on target station If the password is also set on the lower layer communication cannot be performed with the programmable controller CPU on the lower layer Starting Enter password to source unlock m AAAA No Remote Password 1 With setting AAAA 2 Without setting Ethernet O With setting AAAA With setting BBBB Without setting QS Sips al l l l l l O Accessible x Inaccessible l l 1 Unlocking QJ71E71 password enables access to Programmable controller CPUs in this range 6 Ethernet communication a b The communication line is disconnected if the CPU becomes faulty or the Ethernet module is reset during Ethernet communication when the protocol is TCP IP In this case perform the line close processing Close and then perform the reopen processing Open When two different communication systems protocols are used to access from one personal computer to one Q series compatible E71 two station numbers TCP IP and for UDP IP must be set However it is not required to set different station numbers for TCP IP and for UDP IP when using MX Component Version 3 or later and Q series compatible E71 with serial number 05051 or higher Example When MX Component uses TCP IP and GX Developer uses UDP IP Personal computer TCP IP station number for MX Component 2 Q e l
284. on that uses MX Component and perform the open processing again Considerations for using QSCPU In order to protect the safety programmable controller system functions to write data to buffer memory to write set devices and to write time data cannot be executed Considerations for using other MELSOFT products 1 Considerations for performing GX Simulator communication When resetting the programmable controller CPU during TCP IP connection establishment during opening using MX Component a communication error or receive error occurs at subsequent communication In this case perform the close processing in the application that uses MX Component and perform the open processing again Considerations for using Ethernet modules 1 2 3 4 Resetting the programmable controller CPU during TCP IP connection establishment When resetting programmable controller CPU during TCP IP connection establishment during opening using MX Component a communication error or receive error occurs at subsequent communication In this case perform close the processing in the application that uses MX Component and perform the open processing again Target existence check starting interval of Ethernet module If the close processing Close is executed from the personal computer the Ethernet module may not perform the close processing Close One of its causes is the cable disconnection If the open processin
285. op background Sag View network status and tasks Adjust screen resolution Choose homegroup and sharing options a Clock Language and Region Hardware and Sound Change keyboards or other input methods View devices and printers E Change display language Add a device Ease of Access Programs Let Windows suggest settings i nel prog Optimize visual display LE AA 4 3 Select Administrative Tools a gt Control Panel System and Security y 42 Search Control Panel P Control Panel E Windows Firewall System and Security Check firewall status Allow a program through Windows Firewall Network and Internet Be System Do and Sound View amount of RAM and processor speed Check the Windows Experience Index 3 Allow remote access Seethe name of this computer Device Manager Programs Windows Update User Accounts and Family Safety Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates View installed updates pp ond Power Options ersonalization r Require a password when the computer wakes Clock Language and Region Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps E Ease of A 1 E Va Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup BitLocker Drive Encryption Protect your computer by encrypting data on your disk Manage BitLocker Administrative Tools Y Free up diskspace Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions
286. osuuog yoeg JO asn JO UONEANBIUO WeIskS zz 3 CPU COM communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O O O Cables for connection 1 Cable for connection of QCPU Q mode and LCPU The following cable is required for communications between the personal computer and of QCPU Q mode RS 232 adaptor L6ADP R2 is required for the connection of LCPU Model name Manufacturer QC30R2 Personal computer connector 9 pin D sub connector Mitsubishi Electric Corporation RS 232 cable AAA Point FP O High speed communication For high speed communication transmission speed 115 2 57 6kbps use a personal computer compatible with high speed communication When a communication error occurs retry the communication after reducing the transmission speed setting 2 Cables for connection of FXCPU The following cable is required for communications between the personal computer and of FXCPU lt When using Mitsubishi Electric Corporation product gt RS 232 RS 422 Programmable controller CPU side Personal computer side RS 232 cable converter RS 422 cable oa F2 232CAB 25 pin D sub lt gt 25 pin D sub F2 232CAB 1 9 pin D sub lt gt 25 pin D sub F2 232CAB 2 Half pitch lt gt 25 pin D sub a AC30N2A 25 pine gt 25 pin For FX1 FXu FX2c FX 422CAB 0 3m FX 422CAB 150 1 5m For FXo F Xos F Xon F X1s F X1n F X1nc F Xan F X2nc F Xac F X3u F X3uc
287. owing manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 169 ainpasoid ssad9y 9 8 UOHEIIUNWWOD ASN Ndd 98 8 7 CC Link Communication This section provides the CC Link communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 7 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using CC Link communication Y Set the CC Link board Connect the personal computer to CC Link Page 29 CHAPTER 2 2 in this section Y Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard ES Page 172 3 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly K Page 174 4 in this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Q02H Local station Sta No 5 Logical station number of 7 is used Personal computer MX Component First CC Link board is used j Accessible to FXCPU with CC
288. p and Restore Back up your computer Free up disk space View amount of RAM and processor speed See the name of this computer WM Create and format hard disk partitions View by Category Y User Accounts and Family Safety Add or remove user accounts W Set up parental controls for any user Appearance and Personalization Change the theme Change desktop background Adjust screen resolution Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Ease of Access Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display IE G a Pz gt Control Panel System and Security p Search Control Panel Review your computer s status and resolve issues 8 Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems time Allow a program through Windows Firewall Check the Windows Experience Index Device Manager Check for updates View installed updates a password when the computer wakes Change when the computer sleeps Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 Defragment your hard drive View event logs Schedule tasks Continued on next page 348 O Start gt Control Panel Select System and Security When using Windows Vista select Classic View Select Administrative Tools Continued from previous page wa Control Panel System and Security Administrative Tools Sr
289. pendix 1 Concept of Routing Parameters The routing function is used by the station of the programmable controller CPU in a multi level system to perform the transient transmission to the station of another network number To perform the routing function the Routing parameters must be set to associate the network numbers and stations acting as bridges 1 The routing parameters must be set to the request source and relayed station of the programmable controller CPU The request source must be set to access the request target The relayed station must be set to access from the request source to the request target and vice versa e The request target is not required to be set For example to perform the transient transmission from 1Ns3 to 3Ns4 in the following diagram the routing parameters must be set to the programmable controller 1Ns3 which performs transient transmission to the programmable controllers 1Ns4 and 2Mp1 which serve as bridges and to the programmable controllers 2Ns4 and 3Ns5 Routing parameter setting Routing parameter setting Transfer target Relay target Relay target Transfer target Relay target Relay target network number network number station number network number network number station number 3 1 4 1 2 1 Only transfer target network number 3 must be set Transfer target network number 2 and 3 need not be set as they are connected Request source 1Mpal 1N2 MN
290. perating Environment esqu ss sete cee e Peed ee heen eae ce ore eel 49 2 4 Applicable Programmable Controller CPUs 0 0 000 cect eee 51 CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION 52 3d Installation de vg e ds 52 3 2 Registered Icons risege ena naa a dtd dt 58 3 39 Uninstallatio o a Ia a 59 CHAPTER 4 OPERATION PROCEDURES 61 4 1 Utilities i aanita a a A hela AR ache en CAR a 61 4 2 Selecting Development Type ooooccocccoccccr ete teens 62 4 3 User Application Creating Procedures 0 00 00 cc ccc tect eee eee 63 4 3 1 When using Visual Basic NET o aoao cece cece eect ec ence renra 63 4 3 2 When using Visual A RDS task be Melt a ib ah 64 4 3 3 When using VBA i occ ee ceased cadena nhs E ee Heard ii 65 43 4 When using VBSCripts 254 20002 adn deai hese ea dweeta cee sdlledewhus eawe haar io 66 4 4 PLC Monitor Utility Operating Procedure 0 0 00 eee eee 67 CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS 68 5 1 Using System Labels 0 0 00 cece cette tnt teen eee 68 5 1 1 Register system labels in MX Component 0 0000 cece cence nee e eee 69 5 1 2 Utilizing labels used in MELSOFT Navigator 00000000 c eee e ar 76 5 1 3 Applying device settings changed in GX Works2 to MX Component 79 12 5 1 4 Using System Labels on another personal computer 20000 0 eee eee 81 CHAPTER 6 STARTING AND EXITING UTILITIES 85 Gls O e e 85 6 2 Exiting Utilities 02 A
291. ponent and all N of its components Continued on next page 1 Start gt Control Panel gt Uninstall a program lt Windows XP gt Start gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs 2 Select MX Component from the list of programs and select Change Remove lt Windows XP gt Select MX Component from the list of programs and click the Remove button When user account control is enabled the following screen is displayed Click the button or the button lt Windows 7 gt lt Windows Vista gt User Account Control sy rogram to make F you started this action continue al ro Uninstall or change an application KAL verified publisher Microsoft Windows Y Show details Cel j Uninstall or change an application HAL Microsoft Windows Y Details Cancel User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer 3 Click the button When not uninstalling MX Component click the No button to return to the preceding screen Components indicate the icons and files installed 59 uoHe E SUIUT EE 60 Continued from previous page unlnstallShield will remove the software MX Component from your computer Please wait while each of the following components is removed 4 Shared program files Standard program files Folder items Program folders Program directories ES Program registry entries U
292. ponent gateway functions O Ethernet JE OIE Programmable controller CPU data are read written with GOT m Fpp eE al SILE AR it Mitsubishi Company A Company B programmable programmable programmable controller controller controller 14 Compatibility with GOT transparent function Using the GOT transparent function the programmable controller CPU can be accessed via GOT ll MX Component GOT m 15 Reduction of error description search time The ActSupport control for troubleshooting function is supported The error description and corrective action are displayed within the user application by only specifying the error cod e Therefore checking error description or corrective action on the programming manual is not required when an error occurs in a control lt Example of displaying error description on message box gt 28 USB driver connect error 5 Connection of the USB driver failed The corrective action is as follows ed cap EO description and corrective action are display de Exit the program and restart the IBM PC AT compatible Reinstal
293. ponent refer to the following section K Page 175 Section 8 8 1 Switch settings of CC Link G4 module O Cables Communications between the personal computer and CC Link G4 module require the RS 232 RS 422 conversion cables as used in CPU COM communication For details refer to the following section 3 Page 38 Section 2 2 2 3 2 Cables for connection of FXCPU 10 Q series bus communication only when PC CPU module is used XP Vista W7 32 bit O x x W7 64 bit x O Considerations Use the MELSECNET H communication and CC Link communication controls to access other stations via the MELSECNET H module and CC Link module controlled by the PC CPU module 45 SWO UONEdIUNWWOD JO siel9q ZZZ WJO4 uogosuuog yoeg JO esn 104 UONEANBIUO Wajs s zz 46 11 GX Simulator communication XP Vista W7 32 bit O W7 64 bit O O Considerations When performing GX Simulator communication use GX Developer Version 8 SW8D5C GPPW and GX Simulator Version 7 SW7D5C LLT or later Point GX Developer and GX Simulator must be purchased separately 12 GX Simulator2 communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O Considerations When performing GX Simulator2 communication use GX Works2 Version 1 SW1DNC GXW2 or later Point GX Works2 must be purchased separately CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 13 Modem communicati
294. r communication by connecting the personal computer to Ethernet module or the built in Ethernet port CPU CPU COM communication Abbreviation of communication performed by connecting the personal computer to the RS 232 or RS 422 connector of programmable controller CPU CPU USB communication Abbreviation for communication by connecting personal computer to the USB connector of QCPU Q mode LCPU MELSECNET H communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using MELSECNET H board CC Link IE Controller Network communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using CC Link IE Controller Network board CC Link IE Field Network communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using CC Link IE Field Network board CC Link communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using CC Link board CC Link G4 communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU using CC Link G4 module Q series bus communication Abbreviation for communication with programmable controller CPU on the same base using PC CPU module GX Simulator communication Abbreviation for communication with GX Simulator GX Simulator2 communication Abbreviation for communication using the simulation functions of GX Works2 Modem communication Abbreviation for communication with programmab
295. r_Sample Cancel lt Back Next Registration complete 184 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 3 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the GX Simulator communication settings using the logical station number set in 2 in this section Operating procedure elegi n Setup Unity mee 1 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the Target setting List view Connection test logical station number 9 Logical station number 9 GX Simulator_Sample zl Delete Check the logical station number settings nE PC UF GX Simulator CPU type faoz Time out 110000 ms rm ca Lo les 2 Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 8 GX Simulator_Sample y Test Communication diagnosis count 5 Result logical station number 9 Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication 2 ms oo gt Q 9 Q amp 3 n E xy es Je 3 Clickthe Tst button to check that 8 o 2o communication is being performed normally 5 3 E Click 2 If an error occurs check the error code and remove the 5 oO error 5 The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For detail
296. rammable controller CPU Operating procedure O online D indicates the menu operation Screen display Describes the screen displayed when the function is used Indicates the section of currently open page AABN SOPLO Dd ZL 5 indicates the reference page A Punos auu VO SUO1EIodO TEL GE indicates endatails of Communication Setting Wizard refer to the following section the useful tip Lge 91 Section 7 1 8 Operations on Communication Setting Wizard screens Ll indi j indicates OJ indicates the Point Point indi the particular reference manual acdetails on the connection format of each callback function refer to the following manual i K Component Version 4 Programming Manual attention Operating procedure The following three types of procedure are found under _ Operating procedure 1 When the operation is performed with a single step Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Applictaion gt MX Component 2 When the operation is performed with multiple steps 1 Turn OFF the personal computer 2 Turn OFF the conversion cable converter Ground the FG terminal if provided 3 When the operation can be performed by more than one method e Menu gt Exit Communication Setup Utility e Clickthe __ _ button at bottom right of the screen 17 18 e Symbols used in this manual The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples O
297. rd Connect module GOT Port No 5011 Time out 60000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F Ethernet board Module type GOT Host IP Address 192 168 0 1 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page ae The Communication wizard has finished collecting information 5 Enter a comment and click the button Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment GOT_Sample Cancel lt Back Registration complete ainpesoid SSIDIY 9L 8 uonesjunuwoy vonouny emae 918 227 4 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the gateway function communication settings using the logical station number set in 3 in this section Operating procedure Eg Co cation Setup Util econ E Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 16 GOT_Sample Y Delete Ethernet Ee PC UF Ethernet CPU type cor Port No son Module type sor Time out 60000 ms Host P Address 192 168 0 1 Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count o Result CPU name Mean time of communication ext Ey Communication Setup Utilit fon Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 16 GOT_Sample z Test pE Communica
298. rface modules 1 Configuration y Connected Connected Relayed station CPU module module Ethernet Relayed network a z Relayed station Relayed CPU module ZEREA Personal computer 2 Accessibility list Point The connected station CPUs are all accessible The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by accessible or x inaccessible The Ethernet parameters are required to be set in the PLC parameter setting of GX Works2 Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network acpu Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU A Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control 2 3 2 2 x CC IE Field 2 O O O O hill MELSECNET H 4 O O x O O x Q mode jes tible E71 Q series compatible al os y 5 5 z QSCPU 1 Serial communication o x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x bal E be 3 4 D 6 not supported Relayed stations cannot be accessed through QSCPU Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is Also set the Station No IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system
299. rget setting List view Connection test 13 CC E Field_Sample zi Test 5 Logical station number Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count f Result CPU name Mean time of communication Click S Communication test complete Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 13 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 13 Click the button to check that communication is being performed normally Test If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 203 98 Inpa901d ssa00V l 8 UOHEIUNWWOD YMN PI 31 AUN 9O l 8 8 14 Q Series Bus Communication This section provides the Q series bus communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 14 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmabl
300. rives U Human Interface Devices Ca IDE ATA ATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers Jungo Keyboards FA Mice and other pointing devices Monitors i Network adapters 4p Other devices ja Universal Serial Bus USB Controller i Unknown device Portable Devices Update Driver Software B Processors Disable Sound video and ga gH System devices Universal Serial Bus Scan for hardware changes le Value USB VID_06D38PID_D1E08REV_0100 USB VID_06D38PID_01E0 Uninstall Properties Opens property sheet for the current selection b Procedure for update 1 Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with USB cable 2 Device Manager 2 Start the Device Manager right click Unknown Fie Action View Help oe eA a M amp PC Ml Computer Ea Disk drives device and select Update Driver Software JE Display adapters E DVD CD ROM drives i Human Interface Devices Ga IDE ATA ATAPI controllers IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers Y Jungo Keyboards FY Mice and other pointing devices Monitors Y Network adapters 4 Other devices Ry Unknown device E Portable Devices B Processors a Sound video and y Ml System devices Universal Serial Bus Dy Universal Serial Bus USB Controller itp Un ina Update Driver Software Disable Uninstall Scan for hardware changes Properties Lau
301. rmation for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Logical station number 1 y cme JE 3 Please select the PC side VF PC side VF Serial X r Communication setting Connect port COM1 hd Time out 10000 ms cme su C Communication Set lizard PLC 4 Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF C24 module r Communication setting Module type as7ic24 y Station No 1 Transmission speed 19200 Z bps Parity dd i Control DTR or RTS Control bd ma E i Continued on next page Cancel Start Communication Setup Utility and click the button Enter 1 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Serial Connect port COM1 Time out 10000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F C24 module Module type QJ71C24 Station No 1 Transmission speed 19200 Parity Odd Control DTR or RTS Control 143 einpesoid SSSIDY Z L 8 UONedIUNWWOD jenas 18 Continued from previous page 5 144 7 The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment c24_Sample Registration complete Set the following items and click the Next gt button S
302. rming modem communication for the first time on MX Component check whether normal modem communication can be performed using GX Works2 and then start modem communication using MX Component 8 15 1 Switch settings of Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 This section explains the switch settings of the modules for the use of MX Component Point When MX Component is used the settings of other than As set by user in the table are fixed to the settings in the table Setting Item Setting value b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Switch 1 CH1 communication speed CH1 transmission setting 2 3 Switch 2 CH1 communications protocol 0005H Switch 3 CH2 communication speed CH2 transmission setting 4 Switch 4 CH2 communications protocol 4 Switch 5 Module station number As set by user 1 Set the settings to meet the modem specifications 2 Settings of CH1 and CH2 are indicated below 3 Confirm the settings of the CH1 communication speed and CH1 transmission setting and enter the set values 4 When using CH2 enter the values as set by the user b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 bO CH1 side CH2 side Setting Bit Description CH1 transmission CH2 transmission setting setting bO Operation setting 0 Independent 0 Independent b1 Data bit 1 8 As set by user b2 Parity bit 0 No As set by user b3 Odd even number parity 0 Od
303. rogrammable controller CPU When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3c or FX3u FX3uc the channel setting CH1 CH2 combo box is displayed FX3u FX3uc FX3uc 32MT LT FX3uc 32MT LT 2 series When using the first adapter of FXsu 232ADP which is connected to FX3u 232 BD or FX3u CNV BD specify CH1 and check the setting When using FX3u 232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3u CNV BD or when using the second adapter of FX3u 232ADP which is connected to FX3u CNV BD specify CH2 and check the setting EX Parameter y 7 Memory Capacity PLC Name PLC System 1 PLC System Postioning ord The setting contents are deared when unchecked Operate When communicate with GX Works2 GOT etc by PLC using optional board for FX etc T communication the D8120 specal register of PLC must be 0 deared and must be unchecked F T E Print Window Print Window Preview Default Chek End Cancel SWO UONeEdIUNWWOD JO SIIBISQ ZZZ WJO4 uogosuuog yoeg JO asn 104 UONEANBIUO Wajs s zz 43 4 CPU USB communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O O O About the USB cable The following table shows USB cables and USB adapters whose operations have been confirmed by Mitsubishi Electric Product name Model name Manufacturer USB cable AU230 BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC USB A type USB B type KU AMB530 SANWA
304. rol Never notify SN Setting complete aSMOPUIM UO seBessayy Buen zZ xipueddy sebessow Bulusem Buljgesip 10 SPOYISIA ZZ XIpuaddy 347 2 Allowing the setting without displaying the warning message The following shows a procedure for allowing the setting without displaying the warning message Operating procedure E cating tates k Connect to a Projector Calculator SES Windows Fax and Scan LA Remote Desktop Connection e7 Magnifier gt All Programs 2 Search programs and files Progra Help and Shutdown Adjust your computer s settings Review your computer s status Back up your computer Find and fix problems Network and Internet Connect to the Intemet View network status and tasks Choose homegroup and sharing options Hardware and Sound View devices and printers Add a device Connect to a projector Adjust commonly used mobility settings Programs Uninstall a program el a Control Panel Home ealonicanien System and Security portan eterna Restore your computer to an earlier Hardware and Sound Windows Firewall Programs Check firewall status User Accounts and Family Safety Appearance and Personalization Clock Language and Region Ease of Access System Allow remote access Windows Update Tum automatic updating on or off Power Options Change battery settings Change what the power buttons do Require Backu
305. rom the OFF Toggle force page tron puttan to ON status Device Select this to enter the word device to be written Buffer memory Select this to enter a module start I O address and a buffer memory address Enter the value to be written The following table indicates the input range Word device Item Description Buffer memory Setting value 16bit integer 32768 to 32767 32bit integer 2147483648 to 2147483647 Real number single precision 9399999999999999 to 9999999999999999 Real number double precision Number of significant figures 13 digits Set button Write the set data 116 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 2 6 Operations on Time setting screen This screen is used to read or change the time data of the programmable controller Operating procedure O Online gt Set time Screen display 22 71 4 9 55 1 Wednesday 200 11 2 13 28 22 Monday y For QSCPU the time data cannot be changed Item Description 7 PC Time Display the time of the personal computer Write disabled PLC Time Display the time of the programmable controller CPU Write the PLC Time information to the programmable controller CPU Close the Time setting screen Point Time setting is not available when either of the following communications is selected GX Simulator communication Only the time of the personal c
306. ror occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 8 8 CC Lin CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE k G4 Communication This section provides the CC Link G4 communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type 8 8 1 Switch settings of CC Link G4 module This section explains the switch settings of CC Link G4 modules for the use of MX Component The following sketches are used to explain each module Personal computer CC Link G4 module i CC Link module A O J Point When using MX Component the settings other than As set by user in the tables are fixed as described in the tables Switch switch number Setting Q mode Station number setting switch As set by user Data link transmission speed setting switch As set by user match to the transmission speed of the CC Lin
307. rrectly on an eatier version dows select the compatibity mode that matches that eater version Help Compatibility mode Run this program in compatibilty mode for Settings Run in 256 colors Run in 640x 480 screen resolution Disable visual themes Disable desktop composition Disable display scaling on high DJ Privilege Level Run this program as an Clear the check box SETUP EXE Properties es Right click on the setup exe icon of the installation target in the Windows explorer and open the SETUP EXE Properties screen Compatibility for all users this program and it worked correctly dows select the compatibility mode ersion If you have probi on an earlier versi that matches Compatibility model 1 E Run this program in compatibility mode for ire o dps Settings Run in 256 colors Run in 640 x 480 screen resolution Disable visual themes Disable desktop composition Disable display scaling on high DPI settings Privilege Level Run this program as an administrator Coc cores Select the lt lt Compatibility gt gt tab and click the E hange settingsforaluses_ button Clear the Run this program in compatibility mode for check box of compatibility mode in the lt lt Compatibility for all users gt gt tab and click the button Click the button on the SETUP EXE Properties screen Install the product again lt Page 52 1 in this section 57 Le
308. s Appendix 12 1 Overview of warning messages The user account control function is added to Windows Vista and Windows 7 By this function a warning message is displayed when executing utilities with the administrator authority Page 85 Section 6 1 lt Windows Vista gt lt Windows 7 gt Don t run the program unless you know where it s from or you ve used it before Program name ActComm exe BE ActComm exe Publisher Unknown Unidentified Publisher File origin Hard drive on this computer gt Cancel I don t know where this program is from or what it s for Y Show details Change when these notifications appear 3 Allow Ttrust this program I know where it s from or I ve used it before Y Details User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer soBessau Bulusem JO MSIAJBAO L Z XIpuaddy aSMOPUIM UO seBessayy Buluem zZ xipueddy 343 Appendix 12 2 Methods for disabling warning messages Point The user account control UAC function prevents a crash e g prevention of startup of a program which executes unintended operation Before setting this function grasp that the security function offered by UAC will be disabled and fully understand the risk The following two methods are available for preventing a warning message 1 Disabling the user account control function The following shows a procedure for disabling the user account contr
309. s 1 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the Target setting List view Connection test logical station number 3 Logical station number 3 QnUDE_Sample La Det Check the logical station number settings and naa I CEE AAN Ethernet PC UF Ethernet CPU type QO4UDEH Protocol juoP Module type CPU module Time out 60000 ms Multiple CPU None Sa Communication Menu Help 2 Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 3 QnUDE_Sample z Test Communication diagnosis count pooo Result logical station number 3 Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Co o Mean time of communication w w q gt s T 38 3 Clickthe ve button to check that 3 communication is being performed normally F z Test Click y Glee If an error occurs check the error code and remove the el error E D The error code is displayed in Result At normal 3 termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result 7 For details of error code refer to the following manual D C LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual T 5 Jb m 3 Communication test complete Through the above steps it is confirm
310. s chapter explains how to start and exit the utilities 6 1 Starting Utilities Operating procedure O Start gt All Programs gt MELSOFT Application gt MX Component For the registered icons refer to the following section K Page 58 Section 3 2 Registered Icons Screen display A Communication Setup Utility Starts Communication Setup Utility Label Utility Starts Label Utility ER PLC Monitor Utility Starts PLC Monitor Utility lt Administrator authority when executing each utility gt 1 Administrator authority However when Label Utility is executed the status is switched to the administrator authority automatically When executing Communication Setup Utility and PLC Monitor Utility the performance differs according to the user account control UAC settings 1 When user account control UAC is enabled All users including administrator are fixed at and operate as standard user To execute programs with administrator authority specify Run as administrator 2 When user account control UAC is disabled Programs can be executed by login user s n Buyers 19 85 2 Operating procedure for administrator authority The following shows a procedure to execute Communication Setup Utility with the administrator authority when UAC is enabled The procedure is also applied to PLC Monitor Utility Operating procedure 1 Select Communication Setup Utility right click E Windows Fax
311. s of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual NA Communication test complete Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number 185 8 1 0 GX Simulator2 Communication This section provides the ladder logic communication GX Simulator2 communication procedure and its setting example using the utility setting type Point The simulation function of GX Works2 cannot be terminated even if stopped by GX Works2 while connecting to MX Component The simulation function of GX Works2 cannot be terminated even if GX Works2 is terminated The simulation function of GX Works2 can be terminated after disconnected to MX Component 8 10 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the simulation function of GX Works2 using GX Simulator2 Start GX Works2 and the simulation function communication 5 Page 29 CHAPTER 2 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard E Page 187 2 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly ES Page 188 3 in this section Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section
312. s of wizard 3 Section 7 1 Start Excel or Access T CHAPTER 8 7 Start Visual Basic Editor and create an application Start Excel or Access m Form the controls to be used 1 in VBA ActProgType Set the property of the formed controls CHAPTER 8 Start Visual Basic Editor and create an application Form the controls to be used in VBA ActUtlType Set the property of the formed controls Set the logical station number only gt ES CHAPTER 8 y Create a program using the functions supported by corresponding controls ns EA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual Debug the program Yes using PLC Monitor Utility Y Section 4 4 PLC Monitor Utility Operating Procedure y Completion of user application 1 DA MX Component Version 4 Programming Manual van Buisn uaym EEY senpa9014 Buea voneoddy Jasn oy 65 4 3 4 When using VBScript 66 The following describes the creation procedures when using VBScript Select the setting type y Utility setting type Power on the personal computer and start Windows Install MX Component Version 4 p CHAPTER 3 Program setting type settings by following the instructions of wizard Start Communication Setup Utility and set the communication F Create a website using the text e
313. s3 Network No 2 O Request target 2Ns2 2N3 sJajoweJeg Bunnoy jo daguo xipuaddy Mp Control station Ns Normal station station that can be control station Routing parameter setting N Normal station Transfer target Relay target Relay target network number network number station number 3 2 4 Transfer target network number 1 and 2 need not be set as they are connected s s Routing parameter setting areas 297 298 2 Up to 16 transfer target network numbers can be set to the programmable controller CPU 16 different network numbers allow the host station to be a request source or other stations to be accessed via the host station 3 Routing parameter setting areas and data For transient transmission the routing parameter setting areas differ according to the system a Two level system The routing parameters are not required to be set because transient transmission is performed to within the same network Request source C N etwork No 1 Request target b Multi level 1 two networks Set the routing parameters only to the station of the request source To the request source set the data to access the request target network number 2 source Relayed station Network No 1 Network No 2 target Request c Multi level 2 three networks Set th
314. setting Target setting 3 K Refresh parameter Check Default 8 8 heck Defaut 22 le co FET Ss Verify End Cancel lo T E sa z 2 Tb CCIE Control utility 2g 4 Click the __ __ button and write the parameter to al m o napada the CC Link IE Controller Network board 3 hh Is that OK 3 Cc gt oO No D o 5 Continued on next page 195 Continued from previous page 5 Click the button on the CC IE Control utility Networktype CCIE Ce screen Check that the loop is normal Check complete 6 Click the button to exit from the utility 3 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the 2 Enter 12 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number 3 Set the following items and click the Next gt Please select the PC side VF button Pcsideu CCEControiboard y Communication setting Board No 1st module
315. sible devices for CC Link communication 1 For another station access Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Function input FX O x O x x Function output FY Q x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O x x Special register SD O O x x Input relay X O O O x o Output relay Y O O O x o i Internal relay M O O O x o l Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O x x Edge relay V O x O x x Link relay B O x O x x Data register D Q O O x OR Link register W O x O x x Contact TS O x O x o l Timer z T Coil TC O x O x ot Present value TN O x O x ot Contact TS O x O x ou ose Coil TC O x O x o Present value TN O x O x ot Retentive Contact TS O x O x x timer Coil TC O x O x x ST Present value TN O x O x x Link special relay SB O x O x x Link special register SW O x O x x Step relay S x x x x o l Direct input DX x x x x x Direct output DY x x x x x Accumulator A x x x x x 1 Accessible to FX3GCPU FX3u c CPU only 2 WriteDeviceBlock or WriteDeviceBlock2 cannot be used to write data to 2 or more points consecutively Data can be written to one point only Continued on next page 254 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Access Target Device Device Name
316. side VF CPU module bd Communication setting CPU type Q02 H y Transmission speed 9600 7 bps DTR or RTS Control X Control NE Continued on next page CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS Select PC side I F to communicate with The items shown in Communication setting differ depending on the setting set in PC side I F Set all available setting items and click the button The following table indicates the items corresponding to the communications in PC side I F Setting Item Communication Name USB USB communication USB via GOT GOT transparent communication Serial Serial communication CPU COM communication CC Link G4 communication Serial via GOT GOT transparent communication Ethernet board Ethernet communication Gateway function communication Ethernet via GOT GOT transparent communication Modem Modem communication CC IE Control board CC Link IE Controller Network communication MELSECNET H board MELSECNET H communication CC IE Field board CC Link IE Field Network communication CC Link board CC Link communication Q Series Bus Q Series bus communication GX Simulator2 GX Simulator2 communication GX Simulator GX Simulator communication Wizard 3 differs in available setting items depending on the settings on Wizard 2 Set all available setting items and c
317. sis User Account Control helps stop unauthorized changes to your computer s o Found New Hardware Unknown Device Windows couldn t find driver software for your device Check for a solution Windows will check to see if there are steps you can take to get your device working gt Browse my computer for driver software advanced Locate and install driver software manually Gua 7 Continued on next page Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with USB cable and then turn on the programmable controller CPU gt The screen shown on the left is displayed Select Locate and install driver software recommended and wait for a search to finish When User Account Control is turned ON the screen shown on the left is displayed Click the button Select Browse my computer for driver software advanced 331 uopejjesu J9AU GSN OL xIPUaddy Continued from previous page 5 Specify EasysocketlUSBdrivers and click the Browse for driver software on your computer Cha button Search for driver software in this location C Program Files MELSOFT Easysocket USBDrivers Y Include subfolders 6 Select Install this driver software anyway Don t install this driver software You should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software o
318. splayed by clicking e Section 7 3 3 2 1 Basic operations Operating procedure a Adding structured data type e Select a LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window gt Menu gt System Label gt Structured Data Types gt New e Select a LabelSpace name on the LabelSpace window right click Structured Data Types on the Navigation window and select Structured Data Types gt New Aman leqe7 eZ ainjonys Bumnes pe b Changing structure name e Select the structure name on the Navigation window Menu gt System Label gt Structured Data Types gt Rename Right click the structure name on the Navigation window and select Structured Data Types gt Rename c Deleting structured data type e Select the structure name to be deleted on the Navigation window gt Menu gt System Label gt Structured Data Types gt Delete e Right click the structure name to be deleted on the Navigation window and select Structured Data Types gt Delete e Select the structure name to be deleted on the Navigation window and press the Dettell key 127 7 3 5 Referring and registering canceling Workspaces 1 Referring and registering Register a Workspace to be referred when importing a system label A system label can be used in MX Component independently by canceling the reference e When registering a canceled reference the reference is regarded as a
319. ssible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion Q mode CPU V LCPU QSCPU CPU FXCPU CCIE Fit E le oe ei amp E e MELSECNET H O O x x x x QCPU Q mode Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x CCIE field a oF x amp pa MELSECNET H O O x x x x AAA Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x CC IE Field 9 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 294 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 14 Personal computer side port Ethernet board GOT1000 side port Ethernet port CPU side port Q series compatible C24 or L series compatible C24 a Configuration Connected station CPU Connected module Relayed module GOT Serial um a ES Ethernet EPA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed
320. st The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 4 9 4 4 7 CC IE Field Q 9 9 2 MELSECNET H O O x O x Ethernet ox x x O O x QCPU Serial communication O x O x O x Q series compatible C24 Q mode CC Link O O O x O ou Multi drop connection oO x O x y Independent mode Multi drop connection oO x O x x x Synchronous mode g CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x Q motion CPU Q series compatible C24 Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 1 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V QSCPU and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 3 Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP information of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion sy
321. stem and combined system as the Station No lt IP information system 4 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 5 Accessible to FX3GCPU FX3u c CPU only 6 Validate SW6 sum check for the transmission specification software switch setting of the Q series compatible C24 parameter Continued on next page 238 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Field 2 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication o 4 x O x x x LCPU L series compatible C24 CC Link O O O N x Multi drop connection o se O Independent mode Multi drop connection o y O x y y Synchronous mode CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x FXCPU FX extended port Ethernet x ds x x x Serial communication x x x x x o CC Link x x x x x x Multi drop connection x x x x x o 2 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 4 The Redundant CPU is inaccessible to the serial communication module which is on the main base 7 Accessible to FXoNCPU FX1sCPU FX1n c CPU FX2n c CPU FX3GCPU FX3u c CPU only seBue aqissad9y z z 0L UONBoIUNUUO B
322. ster D The file register R can be specified only when accessing FX3GCPU or FX3u c CPU 5 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU Access Target Device Device Name Q172 Q173 x Q172D Q173D Q172DS Q173DS gt n Q172H Q173H 3 a Input relay X O O O 9 2 Output relay Y O O S o Internal relay M O O O T 3 Latch relay L O x x 8 3 Annunciator F O O O S Link relay B O O O Data register D O O O Link register W O O O Special register M SPM O x x Special register D SPD O x x Motion register O O O Coasting timer FT x x x Special register SD x O O Special relay SM x O O Multiple CPU area device U G x om on 1 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 237 10 2 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for serial communication 1 Configuration Connected Connected Relayed station CPU module module a EMI AA Personal computer yed netw Relayed station Relayed CPU module 2 Accessibility li
323. supported 290 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 Personal computer side port USB GOT1000 side port USB CPU side port Ethernet port a Configuration Connected Relayed station CPU module Relayed network Relayed station Relayed CPU module Ethernet al O EA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion z LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode 2 CPU V CPU CC IE Control 3 4 x x x CC IE Field O O MELSECNET H O O x x x x QnUDE H CPU s Ethernet os x x x x x oF O 0 Serial communication O x O x x x N gt 23 CC Link O O O x x x 8 Q CC IE Control A O 3 4 x x x 2 CC IE Field O O z7 a 5 MELSECNET H O x x x x 53 ls Q Q TEDOCRURV Ethernet x x x x x x p 3 Serial communication x x x x x x o CC Link O O O x x x 3 E CC IE Field 4 O x O x x x a MELSECNET H x x x x x x 5 LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 1 Cannot perform communication if a remote password is set to the connected station
324. t O D8121 Station number 12 O D8129 Time out time 200ms 139 se npou uoeorunwwo jenas Jo ShuINes p 8g uoneodiunwwoy elas 18 8 1 2 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the programmable controller CPU using serial communication When using Q series compatible C24 set the software switches Pare c When using the FX extended port set the PLC Page 141 2 in thisisgction parameters Connect the serial communication module and personal computer Page 29 CHAPTER 2 y Start Communication Setup Utility and set the PO items on Communication Setting Wizard Fo Ks Page 143 3 in this section y On the communication test screen check whether ae f communication can be performed properly 7 Page 145 4 in this section Complete 1 System examples The following system examples are used in this section lt For 1 1 communication gt lt For 1 n communication gt y 4 Module 1 gt Q25H JQ series compatible e Q00J Q series compatible LL CPU C24 Sta No 1 LL CPU Sta No 1 il il Serial communication f EA l Multi drop Personal computer Module 2 Personal computer MX Component COM1 MX Componen
325. t COM1 Q00J Q series compatible is used is used CPU C24 Sta No 3 Logical station number of 1 is used 140 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 2 Setting the switch settings of the serial communication module a For 1 1 communication Setting A Item Setting value b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Switch 1 CH1 communication speed CH1 transmission setting 00004 Switch 2 CH1 communications protocol 0000 Switch 3 CH2 communication speed CH2 transmission setting 00004 Switch 4 CH2 communications protocol 0000 Switch 5 Module station number 0000 1 Settings of CH1 and CH2 are indicated below b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO CH1 side CH2 side Setting Bit Description CH1 transmission CH2 transmission setting setting bO Operation setting 0 independent 0 independent b1 Data bit 0 7 0 7 b2 Parity bit 0 no 0 no b3 Odd even number parity 0 odd number 0 odd number b4 Stop bit 0 1 0 1 b5 Sum check code 0 no 0 no aS b6 Online change 0 disable 0 disable re ES b7 Setting change 0 disable 0 disable g 5 12 When the communication protocol is set to GX Developer connection 0H the online H 9 change bit b6 setting is invalidated and the online change is enabled regardless of 3 E the online change setting 8S For details refer to Q series compatible C24 manual S 3 o
326. ta number designation 34H Initial processing 2012 No 2012 Callback function designation 2001 lt Turn on QJ71C24 accessible gt X1E X1F oy 4 wo J71C24 WDT erro QJ71C24 ready r accessib le lt Turn on initialization enabled gt MO M3 x10 x12 x13 Y10 1s YA 130 pJ71C24 Initiali Initiali Connecti Abnormal Initiali Initiali pccessib zation c zation c on in pr complet zation r zation e le ompletio ompletio ogress ion equest nabled n flag n MO lt Set modem connection channel No gt 13 pJ71C24 pccessib le TOP HO H2E K1 K1 lt Set GX Developer connection TOP HO H36 K1 K1 7 lt Set callback function gt To HO H2001 H9 K1 lt Set data for callback gt To HO H2101 H8001 K1 lt Set registration data bytes gt To HO H1B00 K80 K1 lt Set telephone number sMov 000000 pl lt Set no external line gt mov K255 D10 lt Set line type gt Mov K1 D11 lt Writes the connection data TO HO H1B01 DO K40 Continued on next page Auto line connect Callback fixation Point This sample sequence program is installed into the following folders after installation of MX Component User specified folder Act Samples GppW QJ71C24Callback 214 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page y Convert the initializat
327. talled into the following folders after installation of MX Component 5 User specified folder Act Samples GppW CCG4A gt O El n Ze o 32 2 o a 5 179 5 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your selections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station number Please select the PC side VF PC side VF Serial r Communication setting Connect port COM1 bad Time out 10000 ms Please select the PLC side VF r Communication setting Mode a z Transmission speed 19200 v bps Control DTR or RTS Control hd PLC side VF G4 module Continued on next page 180 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the Enter 8 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Serial Connect port COM1 Time out 10000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F G4 module Mode Q mode Transmission speed 19200 Control DTR or RTS Control CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES O
328. tation type Other station Network C24 Network type Multidrop combine Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q00J Station No 19 Enter a comment and click the button CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 4 Checking the logical station number settings conducting a communication test Check the serial communication settings using the logical station number set in 3 in this section Operating procedure E Communication Setup Utilit Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 1 C24_Sample Y Delete aaa i irra wim roa Serial MuttiDrop C au7ic24 CPU type laoo Station No J coma 110000 ms Module type Transmission speed 19200 bps Parity Odd Control DTR or RTS Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test 1 C24_Sample z Test 5 Logical station number Communication diagnosis count Result Diagnosis count o Result CPU name Mean time of communication Click 7 Communication test complete Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 1 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 1 Click the test button to check that communication is being performed nor
329. tches that earlier version Help me choose the settings Compatibilty mode E Run this program in compatibility mode for Windows XP Service Pack 3 Settings El Run in 256 colors E Run in 640x 480 screen resolution E Disable visual themes E Disable desktop composition E Disable display scaling on high DP settings s n Bues 19 Privilege Level F Run this program as an administrator Change settings for all users gt Setting complete 87 6 2 Exiting Utilities 1 Communication Setup Utility Operating procedure e Menu gt Exit Communication Setup Utility e Click the button at bottom right of the screen 2 PLC Monitor Utility Operating procedure e Menu gt Exit PLC Monitor Utility e Click the button at bottom right of the screen 3 Label Utility Operating procedure O Menu gt Exit 6 3 Confirming Version Operating procedure O Help gt About 88 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS This chapter explains how to operate each utility Point For communication setting examples using Communication Setup Utility refer to the following chapter I Page 133 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 7 1 Communication Setup Utility This section explains how to operate and set Communication Setup Utility used to perform communication with the utility setting type AIN dnjes uopeoj
330. teca es Continued on next page 3 Select the Delete the driver software for this device check box and click the ok button 4 Disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it to the same USB port after 5 seconds When using Windows Vista the following screen is displayed Select Ask me again later Windows needs to install driver software for your Unknown Device Locate and install driver software recommended Windows will guide you through the process of installing driver software for your device gt Ask me again later Windows will ask again the next time you plug in your device or log on Don t show this message again for this device Your device will not function until you install driver software conce APPENDIX Continued from previous page Fie e Help CODAE e 5 ac and select Update Driver Software 7 Computer aa JE Display adapters 2 DVD CD ROM drives na goram eae When the USB driver cannot be specified because more IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers 5 Right click Unknown device in Device Manager ee a than one Unknown device exists right click Unknown a a device and select Properties The Unknown device KP Network adapters 1 gy toned ic 0 clad whose Hardware Ids is USB VID_O6D3 amp PID_1800 lig Unknown device Sener IN on the lt lt Details gt gt tab of the properties screen is the 4 Sound video and hninstal
331. ted driver software Windows will search your computer and the Internet for the latest driver software for your device unless you ve disabled this feature in your device installation settings gt Browse my computer for driver software Locate and install driver software manually Browse for driver software on your computer Search for driver software in this location Include subfolders gt Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer This list will show installed driver software compatible with the device and all driver software in the same category as the device 8 Would you like to install this device software Name Easysocket USB Drivers ag Publisher MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION a Don t install You should only install driver software from publishers you trust How can I decide which device Always trust software from MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION software is safe to install gt Continued on next page APPENDIX Select Browse my computer for driver software Specify EasysocketlUSBdrivers and click the Net button The left screen is an example when C MELSEC Easysocket USBarivers is set If more than one MELSOFT product is installed browse for the installation destination of the first product Click the button 335 uopejje suj JOA GSN OL xipueddy Continued from previous page 9 Click the cise button
332. ter E Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Description Password and account lockout Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Windows Firewall with Advanced Security El Network List Manager Policies Network name icon and location group policies Application Control Policies Internet Protocol Security IPsec Administratio Advanced Audit Policy Configuration Name El Description gt EA Account Policies gt E Local Policies indows Firewall with Advanced Sec Network List Manager Policies ublic Key Policies gt El Software Restriction Policies gt El Application Control Policies gt 88 P Security Policies on Local Comput gt ES Advanced Audit Policy Configuration T Audit Policy User Rights Assignment Audit Policy User Rights Assignment Continued on next page APPENDIX 4 Select Local Security Policy When user account control is enabled the following screen is displayed Click the button or Ye button lt Windows Vista gt lt Windows 7 gt F you started this action continue Program name Microsoft Management Console Se Mco tree a Microsoft Windows E am e Y Show details 5 Select Local Policies 6 Select Security Options 349 IIGesip 10 SPOYJON Z zZL xipuaddy aSMOPUIM UO sabessayy BuiuemM Z xipueddy sebessau Bulusem Bul Continued from previous page da Security Settings gt E Account Policies 4 E
333. ter J SW O O O x x x Special direct buffer memory U G 03 O O x x x 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed 2 Disabled for the use of QOOJCPU or QOOUJCPU 3 Ina multi CPU configuration reading from the shared memory of the host CPU cannot be performed Writing to the shared memory cannot be performed regardless of the host or other CPU 2 When access target is Q motion CPU For accessible device list of Q motion CPU refer to the following section lt Page 237 Section 10 2 1 2 When access target is Q motion CPU 264 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 10 9 2 Accessible ranges This section indicates the accessible ranges for CC Link IE Controller Network communication 1 Configuration CC Link IE Controller Network MI Connected Connected Relayed z station CPU module module ZENA Relayed network Personal computer Relayed station Relayed CPU module 2 Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs and own board CC Link IE Controller Network board are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion LCPU QSCPU
334. the lt lt Entry Device gt gt tab c Communication board e Various settings cannot be set on the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and CC Link board utilities 1 Ifthe following error message is displayed start up and close the utility as a user with Administrator s authority This operation enables a user without Administrator s authority to start up the utility Communication Setting Wizard ax y Updating the system information data failed NO7 There is a possibility without the operation authority Please execute it by the administrator authority user There is a possibility that the operating environment of the application is corrupt Re install the application and try again 2 Resume and other functions of personal computer A communications error may occur when communicating with the programmable controller CPU after setting the resume function suspend setting power saving function and or standby mode of the personal computer Therefore do not set the above functions when communicating with the programmable controller CPU Considerations of installation and uninstallation 1 Installation When performing overwrite installation install the software in the same folder where it is installed previously 2 Start menu When MX Component is uninstalled the item may remain in the start menu In this case restart the personal computer Progr
335. the initialization command into pulse lt Initialization command into puls gt sM400 88 H PLS M31 Turning Initiali jon alway zation c 6 ommand i nto puls lt Set the Data for initialization gt M31 M30 mo 1 Initiali Initiali ation c zation e mmand i nabled hto puls TOP HO H34 K2006 K1 lt Turn on initialization request gt SET Y10 Initiali zation r equest lt Turn on initial request flag SET M39 Initial request flag Continued on next page Point This sample sequence program is installed into the following folders after installation of MX Component User specified folder Act Samples GppW QJ71C24TEL 212 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page S lt Turn on initialize completion Y10 x10 170 SET M3 Initiali Initiali Initiali ation r zation c zation c equest ompletio ompletio n n flag lt Turn off initialization request RST Y10 Initiali zation r equest 209 END np vosd SSIDIY Z GL 8 UONEDIUNWUWOD Wspo Sl 8 213 2 When Auto line connect Callback fixation is used as callback function Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Setting Modem connection channel designation 2Ex 1 CH1 GX Developer connection designation 36x 1 Connected 9H Initialization da
336. thernet adapter_Sample CPU COM_Sample CPU USB_Sample CC Link_Sample CC Link G4_Sample com1 GX Simulator_Sample GX Simulator GX Simulator2_Sample GX Simulator2 MNETH_Sample MNET H CC IE Control_Sample CC E Control CC IE Field_Sample CC E Field Q Bus_Sample Q Series Bus Modem_Sample com1 GOT_Sample Ethernet GOT Transparent_Sample USB via GOT Item Description Display the settings of the registered logical station numbers Property list Double clicking the logical station number starts Communication Setting Wizard Wizard button Start Communication Setting Wizard and set the logical station number Delete button Display Delete the preset logical station number Utility Display the settings set for the logical station numbers in the property list Program Display the property list required for setting with the program setting type Save text button Save the settings of property list into a file in the txt format For details of Communication Setting Wizard refer to the following section Page 95 Section 7 1 6 Operations on Communication Setting Wizard screens 91 qe mala ISI UO SUOHeIEdO ZL LZ AWN dnjas uopeojunwwoo 7 1 3 Operations on Connection test tab This tab is used to conduct a communication test on the registered logical station number Screen display Target setting Result Result Logical station number 1 C24_Sample Test Communication diagnos
337. thernet communication control 152 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Personal computer Logical station number of 3 is used AL IP address 192 168 0 1 Il z O Built in Ethernet port CPU Q04UDEH E 2 Setting parameters in case of connection by specified Host IP address only Parameter settings are set from the PLC parameter of GX Works2 Select the lt lt Built in Ethernet port gt gt tab and set the communication settings IP address or the like Q Parameter Setting a PLC Name PLC System PLCFie PLCRAS Boot Fie Program SFC Device 1JO Assonment Multiple CPU Seting Bultein Ethemet Port Setting 1P Address Setting irputromat c IP Address Cala Subnetmaspatem 255 ass as 0 DefeutRouter1p adgress 192 168 o 351 Communication Data Code Binary Code C ASCII Code T Enable onine change FTP MC Protocol T Disable direct connection to MELSOFT T Do not respond to search for CPU Bult n Ethernet port on network IP packet transfer setting 1P packet transfer setting Setifitisneeded Defaut Changed Pantin Print indem review Acronis Asirment cert check a cone ainpssoid ssad9y 8 sndd Hog Jawa ur ying Buisn USA VONEo UNUIWOD zaua
338. tility Label Utility starts Right click Undefined_name on the LabelSpace window and select Rename LabelSpace lt Page 119 Section 7 3 1 Change the LabelSpace name Right click Structured Data Types on the Navigation window and select Structured Data Types gt New lt Page 127 Section 7 3 4 Set the structure name 73 juauodulo XW ul sjeqe was s JajsiBay L G sjeqe7 wuajs s Buisn G Continued from previous page Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Label Data Type Current_tank_water_level Tank_water_level_fault Reference Workspace E Logical Station Number EAS Structured Data Types Structured System Label List Description r Menu M Edit E Help H CAP NUM SCRL 74 Continued on next page LabelSpace Tf you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace Label Reference Workspace E Logical Station Number F Structured Data Types System Label List gt New N Description lee E car Num scRt Menu M Edit E Help H LabelSpace Delete System Label Name Data Type a Device Label 1 Label3 2 Reference Workspace E Logical Station Number GAS Structured Data Types EZ Structured B System Label List Labell Description r
339. tination Name and Phone Number the data which satisfies the both search conditions is searched Perform a selection processing of phone number setting when referring from the Connect Select button Line screen Read phone number data from the specified file and add it to the directory Read file button To replace the data with the read phone number data execute the read file function after deleting all groups and phone numbers Write file button Write the data set on the AT command registration screen to the specified file Point The phone book created using GX Developer can be read in MX Component The phone book of GX Developer is stored in the following folders User specified folder Gppw 103 3 Registering AT commands Set the AT commands used on the Connect Line screen E Modem at MELSOFT application side Side MELSOFT application Default List of registered AT commands NewAT command Edit Copy Move group Delete Select Write file Display cursor position AT command ATactaov1 N3 amp D2 amp K3 Display contents Item Description List of registered AT commands Display cursor position Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered AT commands Display titles of AT commands Operating procedure 1 Select Modem at MELSOFT application side on the list of registered AT co
340. ting example using the utility setting type 8 1 1 Settings of serial communication modules This section explains the settings of serial communication modules for the use of MX Component The following sketches are used to explain each module lt When using Q series compatible C24 or L series compatible C24 gt For 1 1 communication For 1 n communication Personal computer Personal computer Module 1 2 Module 2 m m O SS o o HE i uonediunwwoy jenas 18 1 Limited for use of only CH1 2 Limited for use of both CH1 and CH2 lt When using FX extended port gt Personal computer Station No 1 Station No 2 m Il z se npou uoeorunwwos jenas Jo ShuINesS 18 FX 485PC IF 133 Point When using MX Component the settings other than As set by user in the tables are fixed as described in the tables 1 Q series compatible C24 L series compatible C24 a For 1 1 communication
341. tion of the Q series compatible E71 parameter setting At that time specify any of the IP address calculation system table conversion system and combined system as the Station No IP information system 282 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 3 Personal computer side port Serial GOT1000 side port Serial CPU side port Bus connection a Configuration Connected Relayed S91 Bus eae CPU module Serial gt Relayed network aL Relayed station Relayed it CPU module CEE Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion z LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 3 4 X 3 se CC IE Field El a E QCPU Q mode MELSECNET H O O x x O x Q motion CPU 2 Ethernet o x x x O x Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x 33 CC IE Control DO O 3 4 x 3 x CC IE Field a e a g MELSECNET H O O x x O x 8 9 Q12DCCPU V o Ethernet x x x x x x 3 y OS Serial communication x x x x X x 3 5 23 0 CC Link O O O x O x G S n 1 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU
342. tion 10 8 2 The personal computer used for MELSECNET H communication corresponds to the PC CPU module and the MELSECNET H board to the MELSECNET H module 3 Another CPU can be accessed via the CC Link module controlled by the PC CPU module In this case the accessible ranges are as in CC Link communication 1637 Page 256 Section 10 6 2 The personal computer used for CC Link communication corresponds to the PC CPU module and the CC Link board to the CC Link module CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 1 0 1 2 For Modem Communication This section explains the accessible devices and accessible ranges for modem communication 10 12 1 Accessible devices The following table indicates the accessible devices for modem communication Access Target Device Device Name QCPU Q12DCCPU V LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode Function input FX O x O x x Function output FY O x O x x Function register FD O x O x x Special relay SM O O O x x Special register SD O O O x x Input relay X O O O x O 1 Output relay Y O O O x o Internal relay M O O O x o Latch relay L O x O x x Annunciator F O x O x x Edge relay V O x O x x Link relay B O x O x x Data register D O O O x Oo Link register W O x O x x S S NN Contact TS O x O x oO gt Timer gt o T Coil TC O x O x On 8 Present value TN O x O x o l
343. tion number 223 ainpasoid SSIDIY Z GL 8 UONEDIUNWUWOD tapon 9 8 8 16 Gateway Function Communication This section describes the gateway function communication procedure and setting example for the utility setting type 8 16 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the GOT using gateway function communication Set the GOT tae GOT operating manual Connect the GOT to Ethernet Connect the personal computer to Ethernet Edit the HOSTS file 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard eei lt Page 226 3 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly se gt Page 228 4 in this section Complete 1 The HOSTS file is not required to be edited when the IP address is entered into the host name IP Address of Communication Setup Utility and the ActHostAddress property of the gateway function communication control 224 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 1 System example The following system example is used in this section Personal computer MX Component Il M Logical station number of 16 is used E Ethernet E o GOT 192 168 0 1 2 Checking communication After completion of preparations for per
344. tion test complete 228 1 Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 16 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 16 Click the Test button to check that communication is being performed normally If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility Collect device data using this logical station number CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 8 17 GoT Transparent Communication This section describes the GOT transparent communication procedure and setting example for the utility setting type Point For applicable system configuration refer to the following manual LA GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 8 17 1 Access procedure The following is the procedure for accessing the GOT using GOT transparent communication Set the GOT Connect the GOT to personal computer GOT operating manual Connect the GOT to the programmable con
345. to Redundant CPU supported 286 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported Indicates the CH2 side setting The CH1 side is fixed to the independent mode Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES 7 Personal computer side port Serial GOT1000 side port Serial CPU side port Q series compatible E71 a Configuration station CPU Ethernet Connected Connected Relayed module module Relayed network ca Serial Relayed station Relayed CPU module LEA Personal computer b Accessibility list EN The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Connected Station Relayed station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion CPU Connected Module LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode CPU V CPU CC IE Control O 3 4 x x x CC IE Field 2 QCPU 3 MELSECNET H O O x x x x Q mode Q series compatible E71 Ethernet O x x 7 Serial communication O x O x x x CC Link O O O x x x 4 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 2 Cannot
346. to the control system is not continued by path switch even if tracking is recovered after that 1 Includes the status in which either Redundant CPU is shut off or reset b How to check for path switch occurrence and examples of access by path switch 1 How to check whether path switch occurred or not When communication is performed with the redundant system specified whether communication is continued by path switch due to communication error can be estimated lt Special relay and special registers to be monitored and estimated possibility of path switch gt smM1600 sp1590 2 sp1690 2 Possibility of path switch Reference Since a system switching request from the network module was 2 in this section OFF Either one is other than O f detected path switch may be executed Fig 1 f 2 in this section ON 0 0 Since another system error occurred path switch may be executed Fig 2 ig 7 Since another system error occurred or a system switching request from 2 in this section ON Either one is other than 0 f the network module was detected path switch may be executed Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Even if SM1600 is ON path switch does not occur when the CPU is not accessed via the tracking cable 2 When using SM1600 SD1590 and SD1690 to estimate whether path switch has occurred or not for the Redundant CPU connected to Ethernet select the following items in the redundant setting of the network para
347. top 4 Non expiring password 6 After checking that the account is added restart the Select this object type a personal computer From this location MXPC Enter the object names to select examples IUSR Setting complete 306 APPENDIX Appendix 2 5 Releasing Web pages To release Web pages on the Internet intranet the folder must be Web shared The following is the procedure to share the folders on the Web Though the screen slightly varies according to the Web server operating system the setting procedure is the same 1 When using Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Operating procedure oz 1 ES My Docur _ PaM EQ Program Explore E Start Mer Open El E WINDOW Search El Ey Workspal Open as Notebook in OneNote E E Workspal E All Users Sharing and Security E E useri amp Groove Folder Synchronization a G cpp y Combine supported files in Acrobat E E Inetpub E E MELSEC Send To 4 picture Cut 2 Program Files Copy E 5 project E amp temp Delete a Ey WINDOWS Rename Patri GR Control Panel 2 MXComponent Properties General Sharing Security Web Sharing Customize amp Intemet Information Services Share on Defaut Web Site Do not share this folder Share this folder Aliases Edit Alias 3 Directoy Mxcomponent Application permissions O None Scripts O Exec
348. tput FY Function register FD Special relay SM Special register SD Input relay X Output relay Y Internal relay M Latch relay L Annunciator F Edge relay V Link relay B Data register D Link register W Contact TS Timer Coil TC T Present value TN Contact TS Counter Coil TC C Present value TN Retentive Contact TS timer Coil TC ST Present value TN Link special relay SB Link special register SW Step relay S Direct input DX Direct output DY x x x x O O O O O Of O CO OF OF OF OF CO CO Of OF OF OF OF CO CO CO OF O x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x O0 x x x x lO O O O O x x x x px x x OJO O JO O OJOJO O O O JOJO O JOJOJO OJO OJO O OOO x x x x O O O O O O JO O O O OJOJO O JO O X OJOJO O O x x x x x x xixixixi xixixixi xix x x xixixixi xixi xixixixi x x x x xixi x xl ololxi xixixi xixixixi x olxixi xixixi xiololololxi x Accumulator A 1 Writing to device data cannot be performed Continued on next page 266 CHAPTER 10 ACCESSIBLE DEVICES AND RANGES Access Target Device Device Name QCPU E Own Q12DCCPU V LCPU Q scpu FXCPU Q mode board Z O x O x x x Index register V x x x x x x R o x O x x x File register ZR o x O x x x
349. troller CPU Install the USB driver L Page 328 Appendix 10 Start Communication Setup Utility and set the items on Communication Setting Wizard oeeie gt Page 230 2 in this section On the communication test screen check whether communication can be performed properly o Page 232 3 in this section 9INp3201d SSIDIY 1 8 UONEoIUNUWOS JuaJedsuel 109 218 Complete 1 System example The following system example is used in this section MA Q02H Normal station LIL CPU Sta No 2 PT Y ji 7 i GOT MELSECNET H ES Network No 1 PARA Personal computer Q02H Normal station MX Component USB CPU Sta No 8 port is used Logical station number of 17 is used 229 2 Setting the logical station number setting on Communication Setting Wizard The following explains how to set the logical station number setting using the system example for 1 in this section Operating procedure 1 Start Communication Setup Utility and click the 2 Enter 17 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button This Communication Setting Wizard will set the communication information for ACT You can press Back at any time to change your lections Please click Next to begin Please select the logical station num
350. ts eek athe eats eed Bhan we Ee 122 7 34 Setting Structures aa nenii e Aude Rabe ld dt delat wid dt 127 7 3 5 Referring and registering canceling Workspaces 2 00 000 cece eee cence 128 7 3 6 Change notification iesene n e e a e S a E e e y e i 130 7 3 7 Updating system label data 2 2 6 ete eee ee 131 7 3 8 Exporting LabelSpace irent a a E a AE E E ANE E E A e a ET 131 7 3 9 Importing LabelSpace 0 00 00 a s a a a n E 132 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 133 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 Serial COMMUNICAtION 9 oia o cand ee ached er pa pee wae E TE 133 8 1 1 Settings of serial communication modules 000000000 e eee e eee eee 133 8102 ACCESS TOC UE ti oe ate Sa Lo hh dl eee aes 140 Ethernet Communication When Using Ethernet Interface Modules 146 8 2 1 ACCESS PIOCBdUre o 146 Ethernet Communication When Using Built in Ethernet Port CPUS 152 8 3 1 Access procedure 6 urunane nrun n naarn nuuraa annern nee eeee 152 Ethernet Communication When Using CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter MO a3 anaa A E A eee Ba ee ee ad 158 13 14 8 4 1 Access procedure umi a d nana eee eae ee card oN A Eee 158 8 5 CPU COM Communication 0 00 000 tet teen eee 162 8 5 1 ACCESS procedure ooo 162 8 6 CPU USB Communication oooococcocconorre rr 166 86 1 ACCESS procedure d assirian Headey a ei a eeri
351. unication Setup Utility Menu Help Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 2 71_Sample Ethernet ES PC UF Ethernet Module type QJ71E71 Protocol fro Host PAddress 192 168 0 1 Network No i Network No A Station No 17 Station No J Time out 60000 ms CPU type Network No Station No Multiple CPU 1 Target setting List view Connection test Logical station number 2 71_Sampie Communication diagnosis count 5 Result Diagnosis count 0 Result CPU name Mean time of communication 2 lt 7 Click Communication test complete Click the lt lt Target setting gt gt tab and select the logical station number 2 Check the logical station number settings Click the lt lt Connection test gt gt tab and select the logical station number 2 Click the button to check that communication is being performed normally Test If an error occurs check the error code and remove the error The error code is displayed in Result At normal termination 0x00000000 is displayed in Result For details of error code refer to the following manual LA MX Component Version 4 Programming manual Through the above steps it is confirmed that the logical station number settings are correct This logical station number can be used for user program creation and PLC Monitor Utility
352. unwwoo 89 7 1 1 Operations on Target setting tab This tab is used to display the setting details of the logical station number set on Communication Setting Wizard and to edit Screen display MultiDrop C Connection image gt pc vF coma Module type 0371024 diagram Time out 10000 ms Transmission speed 19200 bps Parity Odd Control DTR or RTS Item Description Select the logical station number to display and edit the setting details set on Communication Logical station number F F Setting Wizard Wizard button Start Communication Setting Wizard and set the logical station number Delete _ button Delete the preset logical station number Display the connection image diagram of the selected logical station number Connection image diagram Click any sketch personal computer programmable controller CPU in the connection image diagram to start the Communication Setting Wizard and the settings can be changed For details of Communication Setting Wizard refer to the following section Page 95 Section 7 1 6 Operations on Communication Setting Wizard screens 90 CHAPTER 7 UTILITY OPERATIONS 7 1 2 Operations on List view tab This tab is used to list and edit the registered logical station number and list the properties required for the program setting type Screen display C24_Sample E71_Sample i QnUDE_Sample Property list E
353. up Utility and click the button Enter 2 in Logical station number and click the Next gt button Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Ethernet board Connect module QJ71E71 Protocol TCP Network No 1 Station No 2 Time out 60000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F Ethernet module Module type QJ71E71 Host IP Address 192 168 0 1 Station No 1 149 eunpesoid SSSIIY Z 8 sajnpojy a9e11a u jauJayy3 Buisn usu uoyeoarunwwog Jeulayla 28 Continued from previous page CPU type Q02 H v Network No Pz Station No 3 The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Comment E71_Sample Registration complete 150 5 7 Set the following items and click the Next gt button Station type Network Other station Ethernet Set the following items and click the Next gt button CPU type Q02 H Network No 72 Station No 3 Multiple CPU None Enter a comment and click the button CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE 6 Checking the logical station number settings Conducting a communication test Check the Ethernet communication settings using the logical station number set in 5 in this section Operating procedure Ey Comm
354. upies 1 station Device Monitor Loadfie Savefle Help Ext Input for Err Sta Clear New EE coi ve iy lel ma 3 Click the lt lt Online operation gt gt tab and click the Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory I O test Test ries wie button Read parameter and target settings from CC Link board driver to CC Link utility Write parameter Write parameter and target settings from CC Link utiity to CC Link board driver Reset operation after writing parameter Reset CC Link boards that parameter was changed Eee C Reset all CC Link boards regardless of parameter changes NN e 0 Compare parameter and target settings between CC Link utility and CC Link board driver Verify z Q ok 0 53 Note Parameter includes Parameter settings and Target settings A AH Device Monitor Loadfie Savefle Help Ext 3 5 8 3 L y o 3 E LL 5 a E CC ink ver tity ccs 4 Click the lt lt Board information gt gt tab 8 Board information Other station monitor Online operation Parameter settings Target settings Memory 1 0 test Test r Sit Chane No 81 Check that the loop of the own station is normal Sta No 1 Local station Ver 1 mode Link scan time 2 ms RUN I ERR Data link status In data link Eror status Normal
355. ute includes scripts Setting complete Start Explorer and right click desired folder that contains the Web file html asp to be released and select Properties Select the lt lt Web Sharing gt gt tab and select Share this folder For changing the alias change the settings on the Edit Alias window The alias is the underlined part of the URL to be specified on the Web browser http _ Mxcomponent NetTest asp 307 sebed qam Bulseajay sz xipueaddy JUSWUOJIAUZ J9ue 1 u j9uJe u BunByUOD 0 MOH Z xIPueddy 2 When using Windows Vista Operating procedure Go G gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools Favorite Links Alema Date modified Type Size E onae F Computer Management 11 2 2006 5 53AM Shortcut 2K8 Data Sources ODBC 11 2 20065 52AM Shortcut 2K8 i Pictures El Event Viewer 11 2 2006 5 53 AM Shortcut 2KB pu Ril Menager o aaa PM Shortcut 2B GB Recently Changed iSCSI Initiator 11 2 2006 5 53AM _ Shortcut 2KB IB Searches Local Security Policy 11 2 2006 5 54AM Shortcut 2K8 B Pubic E Memory Diagnostics T 11 2 2006 5 51AM Shortcut 2K8 Bf Print Management 11 2 2006 5 54AM Shortcut 2K8 ED Relability and Perform 11 2 2006 5 52 AM Shortcut 2KB if Services 11 2 2006 5 52AM Shortcut 2K8 E System Configuration 11 2 2006 5 51 AM Shortcut 2K8 Task Scheduler 11 2 2006 5 53AM Shortcut 2KB P Windows Firewall with 11 2 2006 5 52
356. uter or the PC card PCMCIA refer to the manual of the corresponding product O For modem communication the standard AT command cannot be used for some modems If the line cannot be connected by selecting Modem standard for AT command within Communication Setup Utility specify the AT command on the user side For the setting of AT command within Communication Setup Utility refer to the following section 5 Page 100 Section 7 1 7 1 Connect Line screen When using the callback function use Q series compatible C24 14 Gateway function communication XP Vista W7 32 bit W7 64 bit O O O O O Gateway function compatible GOT For the gateway function compatible GOT refer to the corresponding manual of gateway function for GOT 1000 series O GOT setting and setting between GOT and programmable controller For the gateway function compatible GOT refer to the corresponding manual of gateway function for GOT 1000 series 47 SWO UONeEdIUNWWOD JO SIIBISQ ZZZ WJO4 uogosuuog yoeg JO asn 104 UONEANBI UO Wajs s zz 48 15 GOT transparent communication O Considerations XP Vista W7 32 bit O W7 64 bit O For GOT setting and the setting between GOT and programmable controller refer to the following manual LA GOT1000 Series Connection Manual CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 2 3 Operating Environment The following table summarizes the operating environme
357. vices select ASP and click the ox button To turn a feature on select its check box To turn a feature off clear its check box A filled box means that only part of the feature is turned on e AJ FTP Server a q EJ Web Management Tools E W World Wide Web Services a J Application Development Features EJ NET Extensibility m b ASP NET AP ca 7 Ji ISAPI Extensions J ISAPI Filters EJ Server Side Includes m Common HTTP Features Ea Setting complete m GE When using 64 bit Windows 7 configure the settings sebed q m Bulseajay G z X pu ddy JUSWUONIAUY JOUeI U JOUJE U BINBYUOD 0 MOH Z Xipuaddy on the next page 309 4 When using 64 bit Windows 7 4 g Operating procedure z 1 Select Start gt Administrative Tools gt Internet gt lime y Application Pools le View Hep Information Services IIS Manager and select 1 A 83 Application Pools PRE Application Pools from the left pane 9 is ss is e ind ini ich EA NN Set Application Pool Defaults iD pci on poci om e seve Apto ool we ase SS Select an application pool to be changed and select gt Ll Stes Worl process contin ne or more applications and E provide isolation among different applications P aini Mao 9 Advanced Settings from the right pane Name Status NET Fram Manage Edit Application Pool 22 defau
358. xt gt button Execute either of the following two ways of steps of the programmable controller side settings Follow 3 and 4 of steps in case of connection by specified Host IP address Follow 5 and 6 of steps in case of Ethernet port direct connection Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Ethernet board Connect module CPU module Protocol TCP Time out 60000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PLC side I F Host IP Address CPU module 192 168 0 1 CHAPTER 8 COMMUNICATION SETTING EXAMPLES OF UTILITY SETTING TYPE Continued from previous page PC side UF Ethernet board Communication setting Connect module CPU module y Protocol UDP s Please select the PLC side VF PLC side VF CPU module Communication setting IV Ethernet port direct connection m Host IP Address in Ethernet port on networ Please select the Network Station type Host station y CPU type QO4UDEH X Multiple CPU Mane The Communication wizard has finished collecting information Please Finish to build the logical station number Registration complete 5 Set the following items and click the Next gt button PC side I F Ethernet board Connect module CPU module Protocol UDP Time out 60000 Set the following items and click the Next gt button
359. y car Num scRt Select the set structure name to display the structure setting list Set label names and data types for structure member Page 127 Section 7 3 4 Right click System Label List on the Navigation window and select System Label List gt New lt Page 122 Section 7 3 3 Set the system label list name Select the set system label list name to display the system label list Set system label names and data types lt Page 122 Section 7 3 3 Click Detail Setting on the Device column of the system label list CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM LABELS Continued from previous page 7 Specify a device 8 Menu gt Save LabelSpace lt Page 119 Section 7 3 1 The system label is registered Menu M Edit E Help H Add LabelSpace N Delete System Label Name amp Data Type Device Rename LabelSpace A Label3 Structured1 Delete LabelSpace D Refresh system label data for Control R Logical Station Number G gt Workspace W Export Description a r car Num ScRL EEE 9 D Menu gt Refresh system label data for LabelSpace N Tf you want to register a new reference to a different workspace add the LabelSpace AAA Control a 7 Save LabelSpace S Ctri S R Piada lt Page 131 Section 7 3 7 m c Logia Staton Number gt gt The labels referred from controls are updated
360. y elevate UlAccess applications Es User Account Control Run all administrators in Admin Ap E User Account Control Switch to the secure desktop when pr E User Account Control Virtualize file and registry write failure Not Defined Not Defined Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Not Defined Disabled Enabled Enabled Posix Disabled Disabled Enabled 350 Local Securty Setting Explain User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for credentials on the secure desktop Prompt for consent for non Windows binaries Setting complete Select User Account Control Behavior of the elevation prompt for administrators in Admin Approval Mode Prompt for consent Select Elevate without prompting on the lt lt Local Security Setting gt gt tab and click the C ok button REVISIONS The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover Print date Jul 2012 SH 081084ENG A First edition O SE edition Japanese Manual Version SH 081082 A This manual confers no industrial rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
361. yed Bor Serial station CPU module USB Relayed network il _ Relayed station Relayed CPU module EA Personal computer b Accessibility list The following table indicates whether the CPUs can be accessed The connected station CPUs are all accessible Whether the relayed station CPU is accessible or not is indicated by O accessible or x inaccessible Relayed station CPU Connected Station CPU Relayed Network QCPU Q12DC Q motion E LCPU QSCPU FXCPU Q mode 1 CPU V CPU CC IE Control 2 3 x 2 x CC IE Field 2 O e E MELSECNET H O O x x O x QCPU Q mode Ethernet o x x x O x Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x CC IE Field 9 O x O x x x MELSECNET H x x x x x x LCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication O x O x O x CC Link O O O x O x CC IE Control x x x x x x CC IE Field MELSECNET H x x x x x x FXCPU Ethernet x x x x x x Serial communication x x x x x x CC Link x x x x x x 1 Inaccessible to Redundant CPU 2 Inaccessible to Q12DCCPU V and Q motion CPU relayed by CC Link IE Field Network since CC Link IE Field Network is not supported 3 Inaccessible to LCPU relayed by CC Link IE Controller Network since CC Link IE Controller Network is not supported 4 Set the parameter set values of the target station side Q series compatible E71 to the network number and station number Also set the Station No lt IP informa
362. ystem View amount of RAM and processor speed Allow remote access See the name of this computer Windows Update Tum automatic updating on or off Check the Windows Experience Index Appearance and Device Manager Personalization Clock Language and Region Ease of Access Check for updates View installed updates Power Options Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps Backup and Restore Back up your computer Restore files from backup Windows Anytime Upgrade Get more features with a new edition of Windows 7 ne Ek Administrative Tools Free up disk space Defragment your hard drive Create and format hard disk partitions View event logs Schedule tasks lt Continued on next page 346 APPENDIX Continued from previous page 4 Set the slide bar Never notify and click the button Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer User Account Control helps prevent potentially harmful programs from making changes to your computer Tell me more about User Account Control settings Always notify afa Never notify me when Programs try to install software or make changes to my computer make changes to Windows settings 8 Not recommended Choose this only if you need to use programs that are not certified for Windows 7 because they do not support User Account Cont

MX Component Operating Manual - Automation Systems and Controls

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents